JP6909199B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

In a pachinko gaming machine, which is an example of a gaming machine, in a pachinko gaming machine in which a gaming medium flowing down a predetermined flow path can enter the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device, the opening control period of the first variable winning device and In response to each of the open control periods of the second variable winning device, there was a device that notifies the launch promotion by reducing and updating the gauge (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2017-93541

The gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem that the effect of displaying a display corresponding to an open control period (predetermined period) is insufficient.

The present invention has been made by paying attention to such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest.

It is a gaming machine that can play games,
The advantageous effect corresponding to an advantageous content for the player as well as a feasible after a predetermined time period, with the effect execution unit capable of executing a predetermined effect including a predetermined display update operation corresponding to the remaining period of the predetermined time period ,
The effect executing means is
The predetermined display in response to the a first pattern not the specific embodiments said predetermined display of the display mode after the lapse of a predetermined period, a certain time period as a new predetermined period of time after elapse of the predetermined period is set Any one of a plurality of types of patterns including a second pattern having the display mode of the above-mentioned display mode as a specific mode, and a third pattern different from the first pattern but not having the display mode of the predetermined display as the specific mode. The above-mentioned predetermined effect can be executed at
In any of the second pattern, the first pattern also, by displaying the predetermined display from the time when the predetermined period has elapsed in a common predetermined manner, suggesting that the specific period is set,
In the third pattern, when the predetermined period elapses, the predetermined display is erased without the predetermined mode.
Wherein in both the first pattern and the second pattern, it is possible to the predetermined period a display mode of said predetermined display at the time when the predetermined period has elapsed the display mode, such as remaining,
In any of the first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern, the player's motion promotion effect can be executed.
It is characterized by that.
The gaming machine of means 1 is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
An advantageous effect corresponding to the content advantageous to the player (for example, a V winning big hit effect / a large hit confirmation notification effect of the modified example 1) is set for a predetermined period (for example, an opening period of the second large winning opening 702B / a push of the modified example 1). It is possible to execute after the elapse of the operation valid period of the button 31B), and a predetermined effect including an update operation of a predetermined display (for example, time gauge image Z4 / time gauge image Z34 of the modification 1) corresponding to the remaining period of the predetermined period. (For example, the effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the prize promotion effect / the button operation effect of the modification 1) is provided.
The effect executing means is
A first pattern (for example, effect pattern B / effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4 of the modified example 1) in which the display mode of the predetermined display is not a specific mode after the elapse of the predetermined period, and a predetermined period after the elapse of the predetermined period. With the second pattern (for example, effect pattern C / effect pattern PT-3, PT-5, PT-6 of the modified example 1) in which the display mode of the predetermined display is a specific mode in response to the newly set It is possible to execute a predetermined effect with any of a plurality of types of patterns including,
In both the first pattern and the second pattern, it is suggested that the predetermined period is newly set by making the display mode of the predetermined display a common mode when the predetermined period elapses (for example,). The effect control CPU 120 controls the opening of at least the second large winning opening 702B in the effect pattern B corresponding to the small hits 1, 3, 5 and 9 in the prize promotion effect and the effect pattern C corresponding to the small hits 8 and 12. At the timing Ta3 when the operation is completed (closed), the time gauge image Z4 in a mode in which the gauge remains is displayed, so that the second opening control of the second large winning opening 702B is performed in the second control. Part suggesting the possibility. See FIGS. 59 to 61 / In the first modification, the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4 and the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5 and PT-6 are at least the first operation. From the timing Ta4 to the timing Ta5 when the validity period ends, the operation validity period may be set once more by continuing to display the time gauge image Z34 in a common mode in which the gauge remains. Suggested part. See FIGS. 66-68),
It is possible to execute an operation promotion effect that encourages the player's operation in response to a predetermined period (for example, the effect control CPU 120 opens the second large winning opening 702B in the first control and the second during the small hit game. In the part / modification 1 that executes a winning promotion effect that promotes an operation (operation) for the player to shoot a game ball aiming at the second winning opening 702B in response to the opening of the second winning opening 702B in the control. , The part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a button operation effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B according to the operation validity period of the push button 31B).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

The gaming machine of the means 2 is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
A variable means (for example, a second special variable winning ball device 7B) that can be changed to an enterable state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball P) can enter is provided.
A predetermined area through which the game medium that has entered the variable means can pass (for example, the second large winning opening 702B) and
A specific area (for example, V winning opening 283) through which the game medium that has passed through the predetermined area can pass is provided.
It is possible to give an advantageous value to the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (for example, when the V winning ball holding portion 272 rotates and reaches the position corresponding to the V winning opening 283, the game is played. The ball P1 enters the V winning opening 283 and is detected by the third count switch 24B to generate a V winning),
The predetermined period is characterized in that it is a period corresponding to a period in which the variable means is controlled to be in the accessible state (for example, an opening period of the second large winning opening 702B).
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means 3 is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2.
In both the first pattern and the second pattern, the effect executing means can change the display mode of the predetermined display to a display mode in which the predetermined period remains after the predetermined period has elapsed. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 has a time gauge in a common mode such that the gauge remains in the effect pattern B and the effect pattern C at least at the timing Ta3 when the opening period of the second special winning opening 702B ends. A portion for displaying the image Z4. See FIG. 63 / In the first modification, even when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4 for which the second operation valid period is not set, at least the first time. At the timing Ta4 at which the operation valid period of the above has expired, the time gauge image Z34 is displayed in the same manner as the time gauge image Z34 in the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, and PT-6. FIG. 67 (B). reference)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The predetermined period is a motion detection period in which the player's motion can be detected (for example, the operation valid period of the push button 31B in the modification 1).
The operation detection period can be set a plurality of times within a specific period (for example, a variable display period) (for example, in the modification 1, the effect control CPU 120 sets the operation valid period twice in the button operation effect. Production pattern PT-3, PT-5, PT-6 can be executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The effect executing means is
In the first pattern and the second pattern, the predetermined display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has the effect pattern B and the effect pattern C in the second large winning opening 702B. In the part / modification example 1 in which the display of the time gauge image Z4 in such a manner that the gauge remains from the timing Ta3 at which the opening control of the above is completed (closed) to the timing Ta4 at which the V winning determination is performed is continued, the effect control is performed. In the effect patterns PT-2, PT-4 and the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, PT-6, the gauge remains from the timing Ta4 to the timing Ta5 when the first operation valid period ends. The part that continues to display the time gauge image Z34 in a common aspect),
The predetermined effect can be executed in the third pattern in which the predetermined display is erased when the predetermined period elapses or before the predetermined period elapses (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has the second major winning opening in the effect pattern A). A portion where the time gauge image Z4 is erased at the timing Ta3 when the opening control of the 702B is completed (closed). See FIGS. 60 and 61 / In the first modification, the effect control CPU 120 is the first time in the effect pattern PT-1. The part where the time gauge image Z34 is erased at the timing Ta4 when the operation validity period of the above has expired. See FIG. 68).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The effect executing means continuously displays the predetermined display even after the predetermined period has elapsed, regardless of whether or not the predetermined effect is executed in the second pattern (for example, newly determined after the predetermined period has elapsed). Even in the effect pattern A in which the period is not set and the effect pattern PT-1 of the modification example 1, that is, regardless of whether or not the predetermined effect is executed in the second pattern, the predetermined display is displayed even after the elapse of the predetermined period. The part to be displayed continuously. Modification example)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.

In addition, the present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have a configuration other than the invention-specific matters together with the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention. It may have.

It is a front view which shows the gaming machine in embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of a pachinko game machine. It is a schematic front view which shows the 2nd special variable winning ball apparatus. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the game board was seen diagonally from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the state which the game board was seen from diagonally behind. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a state in which the second prize-winning door is in the closed position, and (B) is a cross-sectional view showing the second prize-winning door in the state where the second prize-winning door is in the open position. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a first storage mechanism in a state where the first storage plate is in the storage position, and (B) is a state where the first storage plate is in the release position. (A) is a cross-sectional view showing a second storage mechanism in the first rotation state of the distribution member, (B) is a second storage mechanism in the second rotation state of the distribution member, and (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of (A). Is. (A) is a state in which one game ball is stored in the second storage unit, (B) is a state in which the subsequent game ball is guided to the discharge path, and (C) is a state in which the stored game ball is distributed. FIG. 3D is a schematic view showing a second storage portion in a state of being held by the member and in a state of releasing the game ball toward the rotating body by the distribution member. (A) is a state in which two game balls are stored in the second storage unit, (B) is a state in which subsequent game balls are guided to the discharge path, and (C) is a state in which the first stored game ball is stored. The state of being held by the distribution member, (D) is the state of releasing the leading game ball toward the rotating body by the distribution member, and (E) is the state of holding the stored subsequent game ball by the distribution member. (F) is a schematic view showing a second storage part in a state where a subsequent game ball is released toward a rotating body by a distribution member. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the structure of the lower part of the 2nd special variable winning ball apparatus. (A) is a state in which the opening / closing plate is in the open position, (B) is a state in which the opening / closing plate is in the closed position, and (C) and (D) are plan sectional views showing a rotating body. 12 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 12C. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 12 (C), and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C'-C'in FIG. 12 (D). (A) is a front view showing the origin position of the movable passage body and the movable body, and (B) is a front view showing the advance position of the movable passage body and the movable body. (A) is a horizontal sectional view of the movable passage body, (B) is a schematic front sectional view showing a state of a game ball flowing down in the first movable part, and (C) is a state of a game ball flowing down in the first movable part. It is a schematic side sectional view shown. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the origin position of the effect movable body, and (B) is a schematic view showing the advance position of the effect movable body. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which saw the structure of the production movable body diagonally from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which shows the state which the structure of the production movable body is seen from diagonally behind. It is a schematic front view which shows the state which the effect movable body is located at the effect body origin position. It is a schematic front view which shows the state which the effect movable body is located between the effect body origin position and the effect body advance position. It is a schematic front view which shows the state which the effect movable body moved to the effect body advance position. It is a schematic rear view which shows the state which the effect movable body is in the 1st decorative state at the effect body advance position. It is a schematic front view which shows the state which changed from the 1st decorative state to the 2nd decorative state at the production body advance position. It is a schematic rear view which shows the state which changed from the 1st decorative state to the 2nd decorative state at the production body advance position. FIG. 25 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number value counted on the side of a main board. (A) to (D) are explanatory views showing an example of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a special figure display result determination table, (B) is a diagram showing the number of reserved storages of the special figure, and (C) is a diagram showing the end condition of the high base state. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table A, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table B, and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table C. (A) is a diagram showing the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol determined in the low base state, (B) is a diagram showing the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol determined in the high base states A and B, and (C) is a normal symbol. 2A is a diagram showing the opening contents of the second start winning opening based on the above, FIG. 3D is a diagram showing a configuration example of a normal figure display result determination table, and FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol process process. (A) is a diagram showing a control pattern of the second special variable winning ball device, (B) is a diagram showing the contents of the first control and the second control, and (C) is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of control of the first pattern, (D). ) Is an explanatory diagram showing a control flow of the second pattern. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit opening preprocessing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of processing during small hit opening. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the small hit end processing. (A) to (E) are explanatory views showing the first opening state in the small hit game state of small hits 2, 4, 6, and 10. (A) to (E) are explanatory views showing the second opening situation in the small hit game state of small hits 2, 4, 6, and 10. Examples 1 (A) to (D) show a situation in which the game ball is held in the lost ball holding portion, and Examples (E) to (H) show a situation in which the game ball is held in the lost ball holding portion. It is explanatory drawing which shows. It is explanatory drawing which shows the situation which the storage of the game ball of the 1st storage part is released after the movable passage body moves. (A) to (D) are explanatory diagrams showing the flow of V winning, (E) to (G) are explanatory diagrams showing the flow of loss, and (H) is the game ball held in the loss ball holding portion. It is explanatory drawing which shows the situation. (A) to (C) are explanatory views showing the V winning rate. (A) is when the game ball is not held by the lost ball holding portion, (B) is when one game ball is held by the lost ball holding portion, and (C) is held by three game balls by the lost ball holding portion. When this is done, (D) is a chart showing the V winning rate when five game balls are held in the lost ball holding portion. (A) is a plan view of a rotating body showing a state in which the game ball passes through the discharge port, (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line HH of (A), and (C) shows a state in which the game ball falls from the discharge port. A cross-sectional view of the rotating body, (D) is a plan view of the rotating body showing a state in which ball biting has occurred at the discharge port, (E) is a JJ cross-sectional view of (D), and (F) is a ball biting elimination operation. It is sectional drawing of the rotating body which shows the execution state. It is a schematic explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the 2nd guide path and a rotating body. (A) is a state in which a non-spherical object is stored in the first storage portion, (B) is a state in which the storage in the first storage portion is released but the non-spherical object does not flow down, and (C) is the first. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which the storage of the storage part was released and the non-spherical object flowed down. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the period when the 2nd big winning opening is opened in the small hit 1, 3, 5, 9 and the small hit 8, 12. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the period when the 2nd big winning opening is opened in the small hit 2, 4, 6 and 10. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the period when the 2nd big prize opening is opened in small hits 7 and 11. It is a timing chart which shows the flow which V prize occurs after the 1st storage mechanism is released in small hits 1-7, 9-11. It is a timing chart which shows the flow that the V prize does not occur after the 1st storage mechanism is released in small hits 1-7, 9-11. It is a timing chart which shows the flow that V prize occurs after the first opening in small hits 8 and 12. It is a timing chart which shows the flow that V prize does not occur after the first opening in small hits 8 and 12. It is a timing chart which shows the flow that V prize occurs after the second opening in small hits 8 and 12. It is a timing chart which shows the flow which an error occurs by the in-and-out ball mismatch in small hits 7 and 11. (A) is a chart showing a winning promotion effect type, (B) is a diagram showing a promotion mode A, and (C) is a diagram showing a promotion mode B. (A) is a timing chart showing an operation example of the effect pattern A, (B) is an effect pattern B (with V winning), and (C) is an operation example of the effect pattern B (without V winning). (A) and (B) are timing charts showing an operation example of the effect pattern C. (A) to (G) are explanatory views showing the flow of each effect (in the case of the winning promotion effect pattern A) during the small hit game. (A) to (G) are explanatory views showing the flow of each effect (in the case of winning promotion effect patterns B and C) during the small hit game. (A) to (D) and (A') to (D') are explanatory views showing the flow of each effect during the small hit game (in the case of the winning promotion effect pattern C). (A) is a diagram showing an example of a small hit symbol, and (B) is a table for determining the small hit symbol type used by the effect control CPU. (A) is a diagram showing display contents output when a button operation is detected or the operation valid period ends, (B) is a diagram showing a button operation effect pattern determination table, and (C) is a diagram showing a time gauge display mode. .. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of an effect of a button operation effect. (A) is a timing chart showing an operation example of the time gauge display mode in the effect pattern PT-1, and (B) is a timing chart showing an operation example of the time gauge display mode in the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4. (C) is a timing chart showing an operation example of the display mode of the time gauge in the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, and PT-6. (A) is a diagram showing a push button mode change pattern in the present modification 2, (B) is a diagram showing a normal button, (C) is a diagram showing a large button, and (D) is a diagram showing a rainbow button. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table for the first special figure in the present modification 2, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the display result determination table for the second special figure in the present modification 2.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1 etc.)
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the following description, the front side of FIG. 1 will be described as the front (front, front) side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the back side will be described as the rear (back) side. The front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment is a facing surface facing the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the player side. In the description of each step of the flowchart in the present embodiment, for example, the part described as "step S1" may be abbreviated as "S1".

FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko game machine 1 (hereinafter, may be abbreviated as a game machine) is roughly divided into a game board 2 (gauge board) constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame 3 (underframe) for supporting and fixing the game board 2. ) And. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area Y surrounded by guide rails 2b. A game ball as a game medium is launched into the game area Y from a predetermined ball launching device and is driven into the game area Y. Further, the game machine frame 3 is provided with a glass door frame 50 having a glass window 50a so as to be rotatable around the left side, and the game area Y can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 50. When the glass door frame 50 is closed, the game area Y can be seen through the glass window 50a.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, below the game area Y), a variable display (also referred to as a special figure game) of a special symbol (also referred to as a special figure) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating "0" to "9" or a lighting pattern such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Fluctuations include update display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. When the special symbol or the ordinary symbol described later is changed, a plurality of types of special symbols or ordinary symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative symbol described later, a plurality of types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. The variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is blinked and displayed. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variable display.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". Further, the special figure game using the first special figure is also referred to as a "first special figure game", and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a "second special figure game". It should be noted that there may be one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of the special symbol.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area Y on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), or the like, and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effects images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, a decorative symbol (a symbol indicating a number or the like) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbol is synchronized with the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Is variable display. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, up and down) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Direction scroll display and update display). It should be noted that the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are also collectively referred to as simply variable display.

On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display in which execution is suspended or an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be provided. Hold display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display compatible display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable displays on hold is also called the number of stored items on hold. The number of reserved storage corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first reserved storage number, and the number of reserved storage corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second reserved storage number. Further, the total of the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number is also referred to as a total reserved storage number.

Further, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided, and the first hold indicator 25A has the number of LEDs lit. The first hold storage number is displayed, and the second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number according to the number of LEDs lit.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the left side of the image display device 5.

The winning ball device 6A forms, for example, a first starting winning opening that is always maintained in a constant open state in which a game ball can enter by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls may be paid out and the first special figure game may be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning opening (not shown) that is changed into a difficult-to-enter state and an accessible state by the first solenoid 81. The variable winning ball device 6B has, for example, a variable plate (not shown) that can move in the front-rear direction, and when the first solenoid 81 is in the off state, the variable plate is in the retracted position, so that the variable plate can be moved. Evacuate from the game area Y side, and the game ball does not enter the second start winning opening, which makes it difficult to enter (also referred to as the second starting winning opening becomes difficult to enter). On the other hand, in the variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening because the variable plate is in the advancing position where the variable plate advances to the game area Y side when the first solenoid 81 is in the ON state. (Easy to enter) It becomes an enterable state (it is also called that the second start winning opening becomes an enterable state). When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls can be paid out and the second special figure game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be an electric tulip-type accessory as long as it changes between a difficult-to-enter state and an accessible state. The detailed structure of the variable winning ball device 6B will be described later.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area Y), a general winning opening 10 that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A, a first special variable winning ball device 7A having a first large winning opening 701B is provided. The first special variable winning ball device 7A includes a first large winning opening door 701A that is opened and closed by a second solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and can be entered by the first large winning opening door 701A (open state). The first large winning opening 701B that changes into a difficult-to-enter state (closed state) is formed.

As an example, in the first special variable winning ball device 7A, when the second solenoid 82 for the first big winning door 701A (for special electric accessory) is in the off state, the first big winning door 701A is the first. The large winning opening 701B is in a difficult state (closed state), and the game ball cannot enter (pass) the first large winning opening 701B. On the other hand, in the first special variable winning ball device 7A, the first large winning opening door 701A enters the first large winning opening 701B when the first solenoid 82 for the first large winning opening door 701A is in the ON state. As a possible state (open state), the game ball can easily enter the first large winning opening 701B.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the first winning opening 701B is detected by, for example, the first count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the first large winning opening 701B that is in the enterable state (open state) in the first special variable winning ball device 7A, another winning opening such as the starting winning opening is opened. More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, if the first special winning opening 701B is in the enterable state (open state) in the first special variable winning ball device 7A, the game ball can enter the first large winning opening 701B, which is advantageous for the player. .. On the other hand, if the first large winning opening 701B becomes difficult to enter in the first special variable winning ball device 7A, it is impossible to pass (enter) the game ball through the first large winning opening 701B to obtain the winning ball. It becomes possible or difficult, and it is disadvantageous for the player.

A second special variable winning ball device 7B is provided from the central portion to the right side portion of the game area Y in the game board 2. The second special variable winning ball device 7B is formed in a frame shape so that the player can visually recognize the image display device 5. Further, the second special variable winning ball device 7B is provided with a second large winning opening door 702A which is opened and closed by a third solenoid 83 for the second large winning opening 702B at the upper end thereof, and the second large winning opening door 702A. The second large winning opening 702B is formed by the 702A, which changes between an accessible state (open state) and a difficult entry state (closed state).

As an example, in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, when the third solenoid 83 for the second winning opening door 702A is in the off state, the second special winning opening door 702A closes the second winning opening 702B. As a result, the game ball cannot pass (enter) the second prize opening 702B. On the other hand, in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, the second large winning opening door 702A opens the second large winning opening 702B when the third solenoid 83 for the second large winning opening door 702A is in the ON state. As a state, it makes it easier for the game ball to pass (enter) the second large winning opening 702B.

The game ball that has passed (entered) the second winning opening 702B is detected by, for example, the second count switch 24A shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second count switch 24A, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) the second large winning opening 702B that is in the enterable state (open state) in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, another winning opening such as the starting winning opening is opened. More prize balls are paid out than when the game balls pass (enter). Therefore, if the second special winning opening 702B is in the enterable state (open state) in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, the game ball can enter the second large winning opening 702B, which is advantageous for the player. .. On the other hand, if the second special winning opening 702B is closed in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, it is impossible to pass (enter) the game ball through the second special winning opening 702B to obtain the winning ball. Or it becomes difficult and disadvantageous for the player.

Further, as will be described in detail later, a third count switch 24B, a fourth count switch 24C, and a fifth count switch 24D are provided in the second special variable winning ball device 7B. In the present embodiment, the second special variable winning ball device 7B changes from the difficult-to-enter state to the enterable state by being controlled to the small-hit gaming state based on the occurrence of the small-hit described later. When the game ball that has entered the second major winning opening 702B in the winning game state enters the V winning opening 283 (see FIG. 13) described later and is detected by the third count switch 24B, the V winning is generated. It is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous for the player.

The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning a prize at the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as a starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, below the game area Y). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of the ordinary symbol as a plurality of types of ordinary identification information different from the special symbol. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of a normal pattern is also called a normal figure game.

A passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the normal drawing game is executed.

In the present embodiment, the normal figure hold display for storing the number of normal figure hold storages, which is the number of normal figure games, is not provided, but the normal figure hold display is provided and the number of normal figure hold storages is provided. May be memorable.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the lowermost part of the game area Y, an out opening is provided to which a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings is taken in.

A movable passage body 400 and an effect movable body 500, which will be described later, are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for gaming effects is provided around the gaming area Y. Has been done. The game effect lamp 9 is configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball toward the game area Y by the hitting ball launching device is provided.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area Y, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball rented by a predetermined ball lending machine is held so as to be able to be supplied to a hitting ball launching device ( A hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) for storing) is provided. Below the upper plate, a hit ball supply plate (lower plate) is provided, in which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed and operated by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

A push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area Y so that the player can perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. The operation on the push button 31B is detected by the push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting the movement (operation, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(2nd special variable winning ball device 7B)
Next, the details of the second special variable winning ball device 7B will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 14. FIG. 3 is a schematic front view showing the second special variable winning ball device. FIG. 4 is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing a state in which the game board is viewed from diagonally behind. 6A and 6B are cross-sectional views showing a second major winning opening in a state where the second major winning opening door is in the closed position and FIG. 6B is a state in which the second major winning opening door is in the open position. 7A and 7B are cross-sectional views showing a first storage mechanism in a state where the first storage plate is in the storage position and FIG. 7B is in the state where the first storage plate is in the release position. 8A is a cross-sectional view showing a second storage mechanism in the first rotation state of the distribution member, FIG. 8B is a second rotation state of the distribution member, and FIG. 8C is A of FIG. 8A. -A is a cross-sectional view. In FIG. 9, (A) is a state in which one game ball is stored in the second storage unit, (B) is a state in which the subsequent game ball is guided to the discharge path, and (C) is a stored game. FIG. 3D is a schematic view showing a second storage portion in a state where the ball is held by the distribution member and in a state where the game ball is released toward the rotating body by the distribution member. In FIG. 10, (A) is a state in which two game balls are stored in the second storage portion, (B) is a state in which subsequent game balls are guided to the discharge path, and (C) is a stored head. (D) is a state in which the leading game ball is released toward the rotating body by the distribution member, and (E) is a state in which the stored subsequent game ball is released by the distribution member. In the held state, (F) is a schematic view showing a second storage portion in a state in which the succeeding game ball is released toward the rotating body by the distribution member. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view showing the structure of the lower part of the second special variable winning ball device. 12A and 12B are plan sectional views showing a state in which the opening / closing plate is in the open position, FIG. 12B is a state in which the opening / closing plate is in the closed position, and FIGS. FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 12 (C). 14A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. 12C, and FIG. 14B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line C'-C'in FIG. 12D. In the following, the game ball may be referred to as a game ball P, a game ball P1, P2, or the like.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, as described above, the second special variable winning ball device 7B enters from the second large winning opening 702B provided above the game area Y above the image display device 5. The first guide path 201 that guides the game ball downward and the second guide path 202A that guides the game ball guided by the first guide path 201 so as to enter the V winning opening 283 (see FIG. 12) described later. , 202B and the third guide paths 203A and 203B that guide the game ball guided by the first guide path 201 so as not to enter the V winning opening 283, which will be described later, and the second guide path 202A so as to be able to enter. The first storage mechanism 204 capable of storing the game balls, the second storage mechanism 205 capable of storing the game balls guided by the third induction path 203A, and the game balls guided by the second induction paths 202A and 202B. The V winning ball holding portion 272 (see FIGS. 12C and 12D) that holds the V winning opening 283 so that it can enter the V winning opening 283 and the gaming ball guided by the second guiding paths 202A and 202B or the third guiding paths 203A and 203B. Rotating body 208 having lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E (see FIGS. 12C and 12D) for holding the V winning opening 283 so as not to be able to enter, and rotating body 208 below the image display device 5 can be rotated. Mainly, a support member 209 to support and a discharge path 210 for guiding a part of the game ball guided to the third guide path 203A to the back side of the game board 2 and then discharging it to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1. Have.

The first lead path 201, the second lead path 202A, 202B, the third lead path 203A, 203B, the first storage mechanism 204, and the second storage mechanism 205 are all tubular due to a passage forming member made of a synthetic resin material. The game ball that has entered from the second prize opening 702B is designed to flow down by natural flow. Further, at least the front side of the first lead path 201, the second lead path 202A, 202B, and the third lead path 203A, 203B is formed of a translucent synthetic resin material, and the game ball flowing down inside is played. It is said that it can be seen through by a person.

Further, the third guide paths 203A and 203B are positioned so as to overlap the left front side of the image display device 5 provided on the back side of the game board 2 (display areas of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R and the like). It is arranged at a position (position that does not overlap) in the hold storage display area) so that the player can visually recognize the display area of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 6, the second large winning opening 702B is a horizontally long rectangular winning opening provided so as to open upward in front of the game board surface of the game board 2. The second prize-winning door 702A is connected to the plunger 83A of the third solenoid 83 via the link member 220, and is a closing position that closes the second prize-winning door 702B when the third solenoid 83 is in the off state. (See FIG. 6 (A)), and an open position (see FIG. 6 (B)) that retracts to the game board 2 side to open the second large winning opening 702B when the third solenoid 83 is in the ON state. It is provided so that it can be slid back and forth between the two.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the second prize-winning door 702A is provided so as to gradually incline downward from the right end to the left end, and is provided on the right side of the second prize-winning door 702A in the closed position. It is provided so as to guide the game ball guided by the wall portion H to the left side. In the present embodiment, among the game balls launched from a launching device (not shown) and entering the upper part of the game area Y, the game balls that collide with the wall portion H are guided toward the second large winning opening 702B. .. Then, when the 2nd big winning opening 702B is in a difficult entry state (closed state), it flows down on the 2nd big winning opening door 702A and is guided to the left side of the 2nd big winning opening 702B, and is guided to the left side of the 2nd big winning opening 702B. When is in the enterable state (open state), it is possible to enter the second large winning opening 702B.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the second prize-winning door 702A is in a closed position that makes it difficult to enter the second prize-winning door 702B, a plurality of game balls are placed on the upper surface of the second prize-winning door 702A. Has a length that allows it to flow down toward the left side, so multiple game balls may win at the same time when the game changes to an accessible state.

In the present embodiment, when the second big winning opening 702B is in a difficult-to-enter state, a plurality of game balls flow down the upper surface of the second big winning opening door 702A toward the left side. The invention is not limited to this, and the delay means for increasing the time required for the game ball to pass through the upper surface of the second special winning opening door 702A (for example, the second special winning opening 702B). By providing a plurality of contact portions alternately provided in the flow direction of the game ball on the upper front and rear walls), the game ball meanders back and forth and flows down toward the left side to slow down the flow speed. By doing so, a large number of game balls are likely to stay when passing over the upper surface of the second large winning door 702A, so that it is possible to win a large number of game balls when the entry state changes. It becomes.

(1st storage mechanism 204)
As shown in FIG. 7, the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 702B is detected by the second count switch 24A while flowing down the first lead path 201, and then the second lead path 202A and the third lead path 202A. It reaches the branch portion 221 with the guidance path 203A. A first storage mechanism 204 is provided in the vicinity of the branch portion 221 in the second guidance path 202A so that only one game ball that has entered the second guidance path 202A can be stored.

The first storage mechanism 204 has a first storage plate 222 and a first storage plate 222 that can regulate and store the flow of the game ball P1 (first game ball) that has entered the second induction path 202A. It has a fourth solenoid 84 for driving the above. The first storage plate 222 is connected to the plunger 84A of the fourth solenoid 84 via the link member 223, and when the fourth solenoid 84 is in the off state, it protrudes into the second induction path 202A and flows down the game ball. The storage position (see FIG. 7A) that is regulated and stored in the second induction path 202A, and when the fourth solenoid 84 is in the ON state, it retracts above the second induction path 202A and flows down the game ball. It is provided so as to be slidable in the vertical direction between the release position (see FIG. 7 (B)) that allows and releases the storage.

The game ball P1 flowing down the first guidance path 201 is guided to the second guidance path 202A side at the branch portion 221 with priority over the third guidance path 203A. When the first storage plate 222 is located at the storage position, the game ball P1 that has entered the second guidance path 202A is restricted from flowing down by the first storage plate 222, and is near the branch portion 221 in the second guidance path 202A. Only one is stored in a certain first storage unit 227 (see FIG. 7 (A)). Further, when the first storage plate 222 is located at the release position, the game ball P1 that has entered the second guide path 202A is allowed to flow down and reaches the discharge port 224 provided at a position substantially directly above the rotating body 208.

The bottom surface of the second guidance path 202A is connected to the first bottom surface 212A that guides the game ball that has entered the branch portion 221 from the first guidance path 201 to the second guidance path 202A and the downstream side of the first bottom surface 212A. It is composed of a second bottom surface 212B, a third bottom surface 212C connected to the downstream side of the second bottom surface 212B, and a fourth bottom surface 212D connected to the downstream side of the third bottom surface 212C.

The first bottom surface 212A flows down the first guidance path 201 by arranging the upstream end portion (inclined upper portion) so as to be located slightly to the left side of the first guidance path 201 toward the substantially center position in the left-right direction. The game ball to be played is guided to the second guidance path 202A side with priority over the third guidance path 203A. Further, the second bottom surface 212B is arranged at a position corresponding to the first storage unit 227.

The first bottom surface 212A, the second bottom surface 212B, the third bottom surface 212C, and the fourth bottom surface 212D are all inclined surfaces that gradually incline downward toward the downstream side so that the game ball can flow naturally. The downward inclination angles of the first bottom surface 212A, the second bottom surface 212B, the third bottom surface 212C, and the fourth bottom surface 212D with respect to the horizontal plane are larger in the order of the first bottom surface 212A, the third bottom surface 212C, the fourth bottom surface 212D, and the second bottom surface 212B. That is, the downward inclination angle θ2 of the second bottom surface 212B corresponding to the first storage portion 227 is the downward inclination angle of the other bottom surfaces (first bottom surface 212A, third bottom surface 212C, fourth bottom surface 212D) in the second induction path 202A. It is smaller than θ1, θ3, and θ4 (θ2 <θ1, θ3, θ4). Further, the downward inclination angle θ3 of the third bottom surface 212C connected to the downstream side of the second bottom surface 212B is larger than the downward inclination angle θ4 of the fourth bottom surface 212D on the downstream side thereof (θ3> θ4).

Therefore, the game ball that has entered the branch portion 221 in a state where the game ball is not stored in the first storage unit 227 is guided to the second guide path 202A side by the first bottom surface 212A and then by the first storage plate 222. The flow is regulated and stored in the first storage unit 227. The game ball whose flow is restricted is located on the second bottom surface 212B. When the regulation of storage is lifted, the game ball guided to the third bottom surface 212C by the second bottom surface 212B is accelerated by the third bottom surface 212C, and then the flow velocity is slightly reduced on the fourth bottom surface 212D.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7A, when the game ball P1 is stored in the first storage unit 227 in the second lead path 202A, the entrance of the second lead path 202A is blocked by the game ball P1. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 7A, the subsequent game balls P2, P3, P4, ... Reaching the branch portion 221 are the second induction path 202A by the game ball P1 stored in the first storage plate 222. Since the entry to the third induction path 203A is hindered, the patient is guided to the third induction path 203A.

As shown in FIG. 3, the second lead path 202A is a fixed passage, while the second guide path 202B is a movable passage, which is formed at the downstream end of the second guide path 202A. By matching the discharge port 224 with the inflow port 225 formed at the upstream end of the second lead path 202B, the second lead path 202A and the second lead path 202B communicate with each other to form one lead path. It has become like.

Although details will be described later, an inflow port 225 is formed in the upper part of the second lead path 202B, and an outlet 226 is formed in the lower part of the second lead path 202B. Then, when the second lead path 202B moves to the passage forming position, the discharge port 224 formed at the downstream end of the second lead path 202A and the inflow port 225 formed at the upper part of the second lead path 202B match. At the same time, the discharge port 226 on the lower surface of the second guide path 202B is located slightly behind the rotation shaft 90A (see FIG. 11) above the rotating body 208. Therefore, the game ball P1 stored by the first storage plate 222 flows down the second induction path 202A by being released from the storage by the first storage plate 222, and then passes through the discharge port 224 and the inflow port 225. Then, it enters the second guidance path 202B, flows down the second guidance path 202B, is discharged from the discharge port 226, and falls on the rotating body 208.

(2nd storage mechanism 205)
As shown in FIG. 3, the game ball flowing down the third guide path 203A is guided from the branch portion 221 to the left side and then falls downward, and then passes through the second storage mechanism 205 and the third guide path 203B. It is guided to the right side (rotating body 208 side). A second storage mechanism 205 is provided at a position between the third lead path 203A and the third lead path 203B so that one or two game balls flowing down the third lead path 203A can be stored. It has become.

As shown in FIG. 8, the second storage mechanism 205 has a first rotating state for storing game balls (for example, game balls P2 and P3) flowing down the third induction path 203A, and the game balls are transferred to the rotating body 208. It has a distribution member 242 that can be changed to a second rotation state that allows it to flow down toward it, and a fifth solenoid 85 that drives the distribution member 242. Specifically, the distribution member 242 includes a main body portion 242A having a concave holding portion 242a capable of holding the game ball, and a connecting portion 242B projecting outward from the main body portion 242A. , The member rotatably attached to the member constituting the third induction path 203A by a rotation shaft 243 extending in the vertical direction, and the connecting portion 242B is connected to the plunger 85A of the fifth solenoid 85.

The distribution member 242 is in a first rotating state in which the holding portion 242a faces the second storage portion 247 side (upstream (left side) side of the third induction path 203A) when the fifth solenoid 85 is in the off state (FIG. 8 (A)) and the state in which the holding portion 242a is arranged above the inflow port 203C to the rotating body 208 when the fifth solenoid 85 is in the ON state, that is, the holding portion 242a is the second storage portion 247. It is provided so as to be rotatable in the front-rear direction about the rotation shaft 243 between the second rotation state (see FIG. 8 (B)) facing the direction lost from.

As shown in FIG. 8C, the second storage portion 247 formed at the position near the left side (near position on the upstream side) of the distribution member 242 is the path bottom surface of the third induction path 203A via the step portion 247a. It is formed at a lower position and extends below the distribution member 242. Further, a third induction path 203B extends from below the second storage section 247 toward the rotating body 208, and flows into the second storage section 247 in the bottom wall portion constituting the second storage section 247. The inflow port 203C is formed at a position slightly shifted forward from the trajectory of the game ball.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8A, when the distribution member 242 is in the first rotation state, the game ball P2 held by the holding portion 242a is displaced to the rear side of the inflow port 203C. , The game ball P2 is restricted from flowing down to the third induction path 203B via the inflow port 203C, and is stored in the second storage unit 247. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8B, when the distribution member 242 is in the second rotation state, the game ball P2 held by the holding portion 242a is arranged on the inflow port 203C, so that the inflow port 203C is It flows down to the third lead path 203B via the third lead path 203B, and is guided by the third lead path 203B and flows down toward the rotating body 208. A fifth count switch 24D (proximity sensor) is arranged below the bottom surface of the third guide path 203B, and a game ball flowing down the third guide path 203B, that is, a game ball guided by the rotating body 208. Can be detected.

Further, a discharge path 210 for discharging the game ball to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is formed at a position near the left side of the second storage unit 247 (near position on the upstream side), and is stored in the second storage unit 247. The non-playing pachinko ball is discharged from the third induction path 203A to the discharge path 210 via the discharge port 210a.

Next, a mode in which one game ball is stored in the second storage unit 247 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 9A, when the distribution member 242 is in the second rotation state, one game ball can be stored in the second storage unit 247.

According to this, the game ball P2 guided by the third guide path 203A and flowing into the second storage portion 247 comes into contact with the tip portion of the holding portion 242a of the distribution member 242, thereby moving to the third guide path 203B side. Since it is prevented from entering and being held by the holding unit 242a, it is stored in the second storage unit 247. In the second rotation state of the distribution member 242, the left-right dimension L1 between the tip portion of the holding portion 242a of the distribution member 242 and the stepped portion 247a constituting the second storage portion 247 is a game ball. It is configured so that only one can be stored.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the subsequent game ball P3 flows in from the third induction path 203A in a state where the game ball P2 is stored in the second storage unit 247, the game ball P3 swings. Since the game ball P2 stored in the second storage unit 247 is blocked from entering the third guidance path 203B by the branch member 242, the game ball P2 is guided toward the discharge path 210. The game ball P2 referred to here is a game ball that has entered the second guide path 202A next to the first game ball P1 stored in the first storage unit 227, and the game ball P3 is a game ball P2. Next, it is a game ball that has entered the second guidance path 202A. Furthermore, in a state where the game ball P2 is stored in the second storage unit 247, the game balls after the game ball P3, etc. are similarly guided toward the discharge path 210.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, the second rotation state of the distribution member 242 (the state in which one game ball P2 is stored in the second storage unit 247) is changed to the first rotation state. As a result, the game ball P2 enters the holding portion 242a by natural flow and is held. Then, as shown in FIG. 9D, the distribution member 242 changes to the second rotation state again, so that the game ball P2 held by the holding portion 242a is arranged on the inflow port 203C and the inflow port. It flows down to the third induction path 203B via 203C.

Next, a mode in which two game balls are stored in the second storage unit 247 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 10A, when the distribution member 242 is in the first rotation state, two game balls can be stored in the second storage unit 247.

According to this, the game ball P2 guided by the third induction path 203A and flowing into the second storage section 247 is held by the holding section 242a of the distribution member 242, so that it is stored in the second storage section 247. become. The left-right dimension L2 between the holding portion 242a of the distribution member 242 and the stepped portion 247a constituting the second storage portion 247 is configured to be capable of storing two game balls. Therefore, in the second rotation state of the distribution member 242, when the subsequent game ball P3 flows in from the third guide path 203A while the game ball P2 is stored in the second storage unit 247, the game The sphere P3 is also stored in the second storage unit 247.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10B, when the subsequent game balls P4 flow in from the third induction path 203A in a state where the game balls P2 and P3 are stored in the second storage unit 247, the game balls P4 , The game balls P2 and P3 stored in the second storage section 247 by the distribution member 242 obstruct the entry into the third guidance path 203B, so that the game balls are guided toward the discharge path 210. In the state where the game balls P2 and P3 are stored in the second storage unit 247, the game balls and the like after the game balls P4 are also guided toward the discharge path 210 in the same manner.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 10C and 10D, the distribution member 242 changes from the first rotation state (two game balls P2 are stored in the second storage unit 247) to the second rotation state. By changing, the game ball P2 held by the holding portion 242a is arranged on the inflow port 203C and flows down to the third induction path 203B via the inflow port 203C. At this time, since the movement of the game ball P3 is restricted by the distribution member 242, the state of being stored in the second storage unit 247 is maintained.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 10 (E) and 10 (F), the distribution member 242 is put into the first rotation state again, the game ball P3 is made to enter the holding portion 242a, and the game ball P3 is held by the holding portion 242a. By setting the second rotation state again, the game ball P3 is arranged on the inflow port 203C and flows down to the third guide path 203B via the inflow port 203C.

As described above, the second storage mechanism 205 has a distribution member 242 that can be changed between the first rotation state and the second rotation state, and the game ball P that is stored according to the aspect of the distribution member 242. Since the number changes, it is possible to pay attention to the aspect of the distribution member 242 and increase the degree of attention to the stored state of the game ball P.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 3, the game ball guided to the third guidance path 203A flows down to the left above the image display device 5, and then falls downward at the upper left side of the image display device 5. .. Next, after being guided to the back side at the upper left side of the image display device 5, it falls along the left side of the image display device 5 and moves to the left side of the rotating body 208 at the lower left side of the image display device 5. Guided towards. That is, the third guide paths 203A and 203B on the left side are provided so as to bypass the sides so as not to cross the display area of the image display device 5.

In this way, by forming the third induction path 203A so as to bypass the side so as not to cross the display area of the image display device 5 and meander back and forth, the second storage from the second large winning opening 702B Since it takes a predetermined time (for example, about 2 seconds) to reach the part 247, it is possible to pay attention to the game ball flowing down the third guide path 203A, and the interest is improved.

Further, since the game ball is stored or released by the second storage mechanism 205 at a position closer to the rotating body 208 than the second prize opening 702B, the game ball enters the second prize opening 702B. Since it takes time to reach the second storage unit 247, it becomes difficult to know whether or not two game balls are stored in the second storage mechanism 205 as described later, so that the sense of expectation should be maintained. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, after flowing down the first lead path 201, the game balls guided to the second lead path 202A side by the branch portion 221 and stored in the first storage portion 227 are released from storage. As a result, when the ball flows down the second guide path 202B and reaches the rotating body 208, it is a game ball that can enter the V winning opening 283 or the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E. May be said. On the other hand, the game ball guided to the third guide path 203A side by the branch portion 221 and stored in the second storage portion 247 flows down the third guide path 203B to the rotating body 208 when the storage is released. When it reaches, it does not enter the V winning opening 283, but by entering the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E, the entry of the "game ball" into the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E is hindered and V It is sometimes called a "support ball" because it supports the entry into the winning opening 283.

As shown in FIGS. 11 to 13, the support member 209 has a substantially horizontally long rectangular shape in a plan view, and is provided obliquely at a lower position of the image display device 5 so that the upper surface gradually inclines downward toward the front side. ing. A rotating hole 260 into which the rotating body 208 is rotatably inserted is formed through substantially the center in the left-right direction. A third guide path 203B is arranged on the left side of the rotation hole 260 in the support member 209, and the game ball is supplied from the outside of the rotating body 208.

A bottomed cylindrical support cylinder 265 that rotatably supports the rotating body 208 is fixed at a position corresponding to the rotation hole 260 on the lower surface of the support member 209. The rotating body 208 is loosely fitted inside the support cylinder 265, and constitutes a path for discharging the game ball to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 (V winning ball guidance path 284, lost ball guidance path 288, etc., which will be described later). It is fixed to the rotating shaft 90A of the rotating body motor 90 (see FIGS. 13 and 14) fixed to the lower part of the discharge path unit 290, and is fixed in a predetermined direction by the rotating body motor 90 (in the present embodiment, a counterclockwise view in a plan view). Rotated around). The rotation shaft 90A is provided so as to be substantially orthogonal to the support member 209 that is tilted forward.

In the bottom wall portion of the support cylinder 265, a through hole 265a through which the rotation shaft 90A is inserted, a V winning opening 283 formed at a position corresponding to the V winning ball guiding path 284 described later, and a lost ball guiding path 288. A discharge port 287 formed at a corresponding position is provided.

Further, between the support cylinder 265 and the discharge path unit 290, an opening / closing plate 289 capable of opening / closing the discharge port 287 and a guide member 291 for guiding the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing plate 289 are arranged. The guide member 291 includes a tubular portion 291a through which the rotation shaft 90A is inserted, a through hole 291b formed at a position corresponding to the V winning opening 283, and a through hole 291c formed at a position corresponding to the discharge port 287. It has a guide groove 291d for guiding the shaft portion 289b of the opening / closing plate 289, and is fixed to the discharge path unit 290.

The opening / closing plate 289 includes a hole portion 289a that is rotatably fitted around the tubular portion 291a and a shaft portion 289b that is formed outside the hole portion 289a. It is inserted in the guide groove 291d. A sixth solenoid 86 for driving the opening / closing plate 289 is assembled to the discharge path unit 290, and the tip of the shaft portion 289b is connected to the plunger 86A of the sixth solenoid 86.

The opening / closing plate 289 is arranged at an open position (see FIGS. 12A and 12C) that opens the discharge port 287 of the support cylinder 265 when the sixth solenoid 86 is in the off state, and the sixth solenoid 86 is turned on. When in the state, it is arranged in a closed position (see FIGS. 12B and 12D) in which the discharge port 287 of the support cylinder 265 is closed.

As shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the rotating body 208 has a disk portion 270 forming a circular shape in a plan view, a plurality of standing wall portions 271 erected along the peripheral edge of the disk portion 270, and one of the plurality of standing walls. A V winning ball holding portion 272 formed through the portion 271 in the vertical direction, and a plurality of (five in the present embodiment) lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E formed between the standing wall portions 271. Mainly has. In FIGS. 12 (C) and 12 (D), the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E are numbered 1 to 5 for convenience as described in FIG. 46, which will be described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotating body 208 has one V winning ball holding portion 272, but may have a plurality of V winning ball holding portions. Further, although the rotating body 208 has a plurality of (five in the present embodiment) lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E, the number of lost ball holding portions may be less than five or six or more.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the V winning ball holding portion 272 is formed by a hole portion penetrating in the vertical direction and having a size capable of holding only one game ball, and is formed on the disk portion 270 side. Is open, and the outer peripheral surface side is closed by the vertical wall portion 271. That is, the game ball (game ball) on the disk portion 270 can enter, but the game ball (support ball) from the outside, that is, from the third guide path 203B cannot enter.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 14 (B), the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E are formed by holes penetrating in the vertical direction and having a size capable of holding only one game ball. The disk portion 270 and the outer peripheral surface side are open. That is, both the game ball (game ball) on the disk portion 270 and the game ball (support ball) entering from the outside, that is, the third guide path 203B on the side of the rotating body 208 are allowed to enter. There is.

As shown in FIGS. 11, 13 and 14, a gaming ball held by the V winning ball holding portion 272 enters below the V winning opening 283 of the support cylinder 265 through the through hole 291b of the guide member 291. A possible V-winning ball guidance path 284 is arranged, and the game ball that has flowed down the V-winning ball guidance path 284 is discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a third count switch 24B for detecting a game ball that has entered the V winning opening 283 is provided at a position near the V winning opening 283 in the V winning ball guidance path 284, and is downstream of the third count switch 24B. At the position of, it merges with the discharge path 210 extending from the second storage portion 247 (particularly see FIG. 14).

At a position corresponding to the third guide path 203B on the upper portion of the peripheral wall of the support cylinder 265, a notch for allowing the game ball from the third guide path 203B to enter any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E of the rotating body 208. Part 286 is formed. Further, below the discharge port 287 of the support cylinder 265, a lost ball guiding path for discharging the game ball held by the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E from the rotating body 208 through the through hole 291c of the guide member 291. 288 is arranged, and the game ball flowing down the lost ball guidance path 288 is discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, a fourth count switch 24C for detecting a game ball discharged from the discharge port 287 is provided at a position near the discharge port 287 in the lost ball guidance path 288.

As shown in FIGS. 12 and 14, when the game ball entering and being held from the third induction path 203B passes over the discharge port 287 due to the rotation of the rotating body 208, the discharge port 287 is moved by the opening / closing plate 289. If it is closed, it contacts the opening / closing plate 289 and stays in the rotating body 208 due to the regulation of discharge (see FIG. 47 (B)), and if the discharge port 287 is open, it flows naturally from the discharge port 287. It is designed to be discharged (see FIG. 47 (C)).

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12C and 12D, the V winning opening 283 of the support cylinder 265 is closer to the inside of the bottom wall portion of the support cylinder 265 (closer to the rotation shaft 90A) than the discharge port 287 of the support cylinder 265. Position) is formed. That is, since the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E are displaced in the outer diameter direction of the V winning opening 283 when passing through the V winning opening 283 due to the rotation of the rotating body 208, the opening area of the V winning opening 283 is larger than that of the game ball. It becomes smaller, and the game ball held by the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E does not enter the V winning opening 283.

On the other hand, the game ball held by the V winning ball holding portion 272 is restricted from falling by the bottom wall portion of the support cylinder 265, and the upper surface of the bottom wall portion is reached until the V winning ball holding portion 272 reaches the V winning opening 283. When the V winning ball holding portion 272 passes through the V winning opening 283 due to the rotation of the rotating body 208, the game ball held by the V winning ball holding portion 272 falls into the V winning opening 283. It will be. Further, when the V winning ball holding portion 272 passes over the discharge port 287 due to the rotation of the rotating body 208, it shifts in the inner diameter direction of the discharge port 287, so that the opening area of the discharge port 287 becomes smaller than that of the game ball. The game ball held by the V winning ball holding unit 272 does not enter the discharge port 287.

Further, although the rotation shaft 90A of the rotating body 208 is tilted forward, the disk portion 270 is located at a position higher than the lower portion of the game ball held by the V winning ball holding portion 272 and the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E. That is, since a step portion is formed between the disk portion 270 and the bottom wall of the support cylinder 265, the V winning ball holding portion 272 and the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E are inclined higher side than the rotating shaft 90A. The game balls held by the V winning ball holding portions 272 and the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E hardly flow out to the disk portion 270 when passing through the above (see FIG. 14).

Further, since the protruding dimension L30 from the upper surface of the disk portion 270 of the standing wall portion 271 is longer than the radius R of the game ball P (L30> R), the game ball P that has fallen on the upper surface of the disk portion 270. Is hard to deviate from the rotating body 208 (see FIG. 43).

(Movable unit)
Next, a movable unit having a movable passage body device and an effect device will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 19. 15A and 15B are front views showing the origin positions of the movable passage body and the movable body, and FIG. 15B is a front view showing the advance positions of the movable passage body and the movable body. 16A and 16B are horizontal sectional views of a movable passage body, FIG. 16B is a schematic front sectional view showing a state of a game ball flowing down in the first movable portion, and FIG. 16C is a game of flowing down in the first movable portion. It is a schematic side sectional view which shows the state of a sphere. 17A and 17B are schematic views showing the origin position of the effect movable body and FIG. 17B showing the advance position of the effect movable body. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the configuration of the effect movable body is viewed diagonally from the front. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view showing a state in which the configuration of the effect movable body is viewed from diagonally behind.

As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5 and 15, the movable passage body device having the movable passage body 400 and the effect movable body device having the effect movable body 500 have a square frame shape fixed to the back surface of the game board 2. It is provided on the base member 450 of the above. An image display device 5 is provided on the back side of the base member 450 (see FIG. 1), and the image display device 5 can be visually recognized from the front side through the opening of the base member 450. That is, the movable passage body 400 and the effect movable body 500 are arranged between the game board 2 and the image display device 5.

The movable passage body 400 and the effect movable body 500 are the passage body origin position and the effect body origin position (see FIG. 15 (A)) retracted to the front peripheral portion of the image display device 5, and the passage body origin position and the effect body origin. It is possible to move (operate) between the passage body advance position and the effect body advance position (see FIG. 15B) that appear in front of the image display device 5 from the position. Even when the movable passage body 400 is arranged at the passage body advance position and the effect movable body 500 is arranged at the effect body advance position, the effect movable body 500 is located behind the movable passage body 400 and therefore comes into contact with each other. There is no such thing.

(Movable passage body device)
As shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the movable passage body 400 is attached to a first movable portion 401 that is provided so as to be linearly movable in the left-right direction and a first movable portion 401 that can be expanded and converged in the left-right direction. It is mainly composed of a second movable portion 402 and a drive mechanism 403 that drives the first movable portion 401 in the left-right direction. The second induction path 202B described above is formed in the first movable portion 401.

A rail portion 401d is attached to the front surface of the upper end portion of the first movable portion 401, and the rail portion 401d is guided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to the upper guide rail 435 fixed to the base member 450. .. Further, an extension portion extending downward is formed in the lower portion on the back surface side of the first movable portion 401, and a rail portion (not shown) extending to the left and right is provided in the extension portion, and the rail portion is provided. (Not shown) is guided so as to be slidable in the left-right direction with respect to a guide rail (not shown) fixed to the lower part of the base member 450.

A passage body origin position sensor 92 is provided on the right side of the base member 450, and a passage body advance position sensor 93 is provided on the left side of the base member 450, and the movable passage body 400 is located at the passage body origin position. When the movable passage body 400 is located, the detection piece provided in the first movable portion 401 is detected by the passage body origin position sensor 92, and when the movable passage body 400 is located at the passage body advance position, the passage body advance position sensor 93 The detection piece is detected by.

As shown in FIG. 16, the first movable portion 401 in the movable passage body 400 is formed in a substantially cylindrical shape that opens up and down by a permeable synthetic resin material, and the bulging portion 413 that bulges to the back side. Is formed at the bottom. A rod-shaped member 412 extending in the vertical direction is arranged at a position corresponding to the bulging portion 413 of the first movable portion 401, and a ridge portion 412a protruding spirally is provided on the outer peripheral surface of the rod-shaped member 412. It is formed. That is, the second guide path 202B is formed inside the first movable portion 401, and the game ball that has entered the second guide path 202B from the inflow port 225, which is the upper opening, flows down while meandering in the left-right direction. After that, it spirally flows down along the ridge portion 412a at the position of the bulging portion 413, is discharged from the discharge port 226 which is the lower opening, and falls on the rotating body 208. As a result, it is possible to draw attention to the game ball flowing down the second guide path 202B, which improves the interest and prevents the rotating body 208 from being damaged by suppressing the falling speed to the rotating body 208.

As shown in FIG. 15, the second movable portion 402 in the movable passage body 400 has decorative members 404L and 404R that are arranged so as to be movable to the left and right with respect to the first movable portion 401. The decorative members 404L and 404R project to the left and right sides with respect to the first movable portion 401 and the non-expanded position (see FIG. 15A), which is the origin position where the decorative members 404L and 404R converge with respect to the first movable portion 401. It can operate at the unfolded position (see FIG. 15B). The second movable portion 402 is located at the non-deployed position when the movable passage body 400 is at the origin position of the passage body, and is located at the deployed position by a link mechanism (not shown) when the movable passage body 400 is at the advance position of the passage body. It has become like. That is, since the movable passage body 400 can be moved between the non-deployed position and the deployed position by using the movement of the movable passage body 400, a drive source separate from the passage body motor 91 for moving the movable passage body 400 is used. Since it is not necessary to operate it, the number of parts can be reduced.

The decorative members 404L and 404R are decorative members for improving the decorativeness of the first movable portion 401. Although not shown in particular, the decorative members 404L and 404R are not shown in plan view from the front plate, the back plate and the side plate of the first movable portion 401. When it is formed in a U shape and is in the undeployed position, the game ball flowing down the second guide path 202B from the gap between the left and right decorative members 404L and 404R is set to the visible first visible state, and when it is in the unfolded position. The left and right decorative members 404L and 404R are separated from each other to widen the gap, and the game ball flowing down the second guide path 202B is set to the second visual state having higher visibility than the first visual state.

(Directive movable body device)
As shown in FIGS. 17 to 19, the effect movable body device includes a base portion 450A forming the upper left corner portion of the square frame-shaped base member 450 and an effect movable body 500 operably provided for the base portion 450A. It is mainly composed of an operation mechanism 501 for operating the effect movable body 500. The effect movable body 500 includes an effect body origin position located in front of the base portion 450A (see FIG. 17 (A)) and an effect body advance position diagonally downward to the right of the effect body origin position (see FIG. 17 (B)). It is rotatably provided between.

The effect movable body 500 can rotate to the back side of the first movable portion 511 with a rotation shaft 510 projecting from the back surface of the first movable portion 511 and facing the front-rear direction as a center. It is composed of a second movable portion 512 provided in the above.

The first movable portion 511 includes a base portion 511A formed in a substantially circular shape in front view, and a decorative portion 511B composed of projecting pieces extending radially from the peripheral edge of the base portion 511A about a rotation shaft 510. Will be done. On the back side of the decorative portion 511B, which hangs downward from the decorative portion 511B, an effector LED 518A capable of irradiating light toward the front is provided on the front surface, and light can be irradiated toward the left and right sides. An LED substrate 519 (see FIG. 26) in which the effector LED 518B is provided on the back surface is provided.

Further, a connecting shaft 503 is projected forward at a predetermined position on the peripheral edge of the base portion 511A, and the connecting shaft 503 is inserted into a guide hole 504 formed in the lower left side of the base portion 450A. There is. The guide hole 504 is formed by the first guide portion 504A and the second guide portion 504B in an abbreviated shape in front view, and guides the connecting shaft 503 in a movable manner.

The second movable portion 512 includes decorative portions 512L and 512R arranged on the left side and the right side of the back surface of the first movable portion 511. The decorative portions 512L and 512R have a plurality of projecting pieces extending radially around the rotation shaft 510, and are formed in substantially the same shape as the decorative portion 511B of the first movable portion 511, and the first movable portion 511 Each of them is rotatably supported around the rotation shaft 510 and is connected via a link member 513. The link member 513 is rotatable about a rotation shaft 514 projecting below the rotation shaft 510 on the back surface of the first movable portion 511, and one end thereof is pivotally supported by the decoration portion 512L. The end is pivotally supported by the decorative portion 512R. Further, since the distance from the rotation shaft 510 is different between the first shaft branch with the link member 513 in the decorative portion 512L and the second shaft branch with the link member 513 in the decorative portion 512R, the decorative portions 512L and 512R When one of them rotates about the rotation shaft 510 in the first direction, the link member 513 rotates around the rotation shaft 514, so that the other is the first direction via the link member 513. It is designed to rotate in the opposite second direction.

Further, the decorative portion 512L and the decorative portion 512R are connected to each other by a tension spring 515 between the rotating shaft 510 and the rotating shaft 514, so that the decorative portion 512L and the decorative portion 512R are close to each other in the first decoration. When the state (see FIG. 23) is maintained and the decorative portion 512R rotates in the first direction, the other decorative portion 512L rotates in the second direction against the urging force of the tension spring 515, and the decorative portion 512L rotates in the second direction. It changes to the second decorative state (see FIG. 25) in which the 512L and the decorative portion 512R are separated from each other. Further, the decorative portion 512R has a protruding piece 516 projecting to the left side of the rotating shaft 510, and an interlocking shaft 517 projects from the back surface of the protruding piece 516.

The operation mechanism 501 is a rotating body 521 fixed to a drive shaft (not shown) of the effector motor 520 fixed to the back side of the base portion 450A and the effector motor 520 projecting to the front side of the base portion 450A. The first arm member 523 rotatably supported by the rotating shaft 522 facing the front-rear direction projecting from the front surface of the base portion 450A, and the rotating shaft 528 projecting from the front surface of the base portion 450A. A second arm member 524 rotatably supported by the first arm member 524, a first link member 526 rotatably supported by a rotating shaft 525 projecting from the first arm member 523, and a first link member. It is composed of a second link member 527 pivotally supported at one end of 526. The rotation shaft 528 is arranged with a predetermined gap between it and the front surface of the base portion 450A, and the first arm member 523 can be inserted into the gap.

The first arm member 523 is formed by the first arm portion 523A and the second arm portion 523B in a shape substantially opposite to the front view, and the bent portion of the first arm portion 523A and the second arm portion 523B is a rotation shaft. It is pivotally supported by 522. A torsion spring 529 is ring-mounted on the rotation shaft 522, and the first arm member 523 is urged upward.

An elongated hole 531 is formed in the first arm portion 523A, and a connecting shaft 530 projecting from the peripheral edge of the rotating body 521 is inserted into the elongated hole 531 so as to be movable in the longitudinal direction. One end of the second arm portion 523B is rotatably supported by the rotation shaft 510 of the first movable portion 511. In addition, guide shafts 534A and 534B for guiding the movement of the second link member 527 in the longitudinal direction are projected from the front surface of the bottom wall 533 of the second arm portion 523B, and the side of the bottom wall 533. Guide walls 535A and 535B for guiding the movement of the second link member 527 in the longitudinal direction are erected on the edge toward the front. As described above, the second arm portion 523B is formed in a substantially U-shaped cross section by the bottom wall 533 and the guide walls 535A and 535B.

The first link member 526 is rotatably supported by a rotation shaft 525 projecting between the first arm portion 523A and the second arm portion 523B of the first arm member 523. At one end of the first link member 526, a connecting shaft 536 that pivotally supports the second link member 527 is projected toward the back surface side. At the other end, a first acting portion 537 that is inserted into the elongated hole 531 of the first arm portion 523A and can come into contact with the connecting shaft 530 protruding forward is formed.

The second link member 527 is formed by being bent with respect to the slide portion 538 arranged between the guide walls 535A and 535B on the front surface of the bottom wall 533 of the second arm portion 523B and the slide portion 538, and is formed as a second movable portion. It is composed of a second working portion 539 that can come into contact with the interlocking shaft 517 of 512. Two elongated holes 540A and 540B are formed in the slide portion 538, and guide shafts 534A and 534B of the second arm portion 523B are inserted into the slide portion 538, respectively.

In the second link member 527 configured in this way, a slide portion 538 is arranged between the guide walls 535A and 535B on the front surface of the bottom wall 533 of the second arm portion 523B, and the slide portion 538 is formed by the guide shaft 534A, The guides are guided by the 534B and the guide walls 535A and 535B so as to be slidable in the longitudinal direction. That is, the second link member 527 is arranged so as to be movable in the coaxial direction with the second arm portion 523B. In this state, the second acting portion 539 protrudes outward from the second arm portion 523B. Further, the front surface side of the slide portion 538 is covered with the cover member 541, and the front surface side of the first link member 526 is covered with the cover member 542.

The second arm member 524 is formed in an abbreviated shape in front view, one end of which is rotatably supported by a rotation shaft 528 of the base portion 450A, and the other end of which is a rotation shaft on the back surface of the first movable portion 511. It is pivotally supported by a rotating shaft 543 projecting directly above 510 via an elongated hole.

(Operation example of production movable body device)
Next, an operation example of the effect movable body device will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 26. FIG. 20 is a schematic front view showing a state in which the effect movable body is located at the effect body origin position. FIG. 21 is a schematic front view showing a state in which the effect movable body is located between the effect body origin position and the effect body advance position. FIG. 22 is a schematic front view showing a state in which the effect movable body has moved to the effect body advance position. FIG. 23 is a schematic rear view showing a state in which the effect movable body is in the first decorative state at the effect body advance position. FIG. 24 is a schematic front view showing a state in which the effect movable body changes from the first decorative state to the second decorative state at the effect body advance position. FIG. 25 is a schematic rear view showing a state in which the effect movable body changes from the first decorative state to the second decorative state at the effect body advance position. FIG. 26 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line DD of FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 20 to 26, the illustration of some members such as a base portion is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 20, in the effect movable body 500, in the state where the effect body is located at the origin position of the effect body, the decorative portion 511B is in the first posture facing the right side, and the decorative portions 511B are combined with the decorative portions 512L and 512R. Is in the first decorative state in close proximity. Further, the connecting shaft 530 of the rotating body 521 is located at the end of the elongated hole 531 on the rotating shaft 522 side on the upper right side of the rotating shaft, so that the first arm portion 523A of the first arm member 523 is left. It is held in a state where it is lifted diagonally upward. Therefore, the effect movable body 500 is held at the effect body origin position. Further, the first arm member 523 is urged upward by the torsion spring 259, and the second arm member 524 is urged upward by the tension spring 550 whose one end is locked to the base portion 450A. , The effect movable body 500 is stably held at the effect body origin position. Further, the connecting shaft 503 of the first movable portion 511 is located at the upper right upper end portion of the first guide portion 504A.

The second link member 527 is provided with the other end of the tension spring 551 whose one end is locked to the rotation shaft 522 side of the second arm portion 523B at the end on the rotation shaft 522 side. It is held at the first slide position on the rotation shaft 522 side. At this time, the first acting portion 537 of the first link member 526 is separated from the connecting shaft 530 of the rotating body 521. Further, the second acting portion 539 of the second link member 527 is separated from the interlocking shaft 517 of the decorative portion 512R.

As shown in FIG. 21, when the rotating body 521 is rotated counterclockwise by the effector motor 520, the connecting shaft 530 is moved downward while moving to the left side, so that the first arm member 523 is counterclockwise. Rotate. The effect movable body 500 descends in response to rotation about the rotation shaft 522 of the first arm member 523, and the connecting shaft 503 is located on the left side of the rotation shaft 510, so that the rotation shaft 510 Rotates clockwise around. That is, the effect movable body 500 rotates clockwise around the rotation shaft 510 while descending from the effect body origin position (performs the first operation). The connecting shaft 503 escapes from the right end to the left end of the first guide portion 504A as the rotating shaft 510 approaches the guide hole 504. Further, the second link member 527 remains held at the first slide position.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, when the rotating body 521 further rotates counterclockwise and the rotating shaft 510 is separated from the guide hole 504, the connecting shaft 503 shifts the second guide portion 504B to the right side. Move downwards. Then, the movement of the connecting shaft 503 is restricted at the right end portion of the second guide portion 504B, so that the rotation of the first arm member 523 is restricted, and the effect movable body 500 stops at the effect body advance position.

When the effect movable body 500 is restricted from moving at the effect body advance position and stopped, the connecting shaft 530 of the rotating body 521 is close to the first action portion 537 of the first link member 526 on the right side of the elongated hole 531. (Or abutting). Further, the second acting portion 539 of the second link member 527 is in close proximity (or abutting) to the interlocking shaft 517 of the decorative portion 512R. The effect movable body 500 is in the first decorative state in which the protruding pieces of the decorative portions 511B and the decorative portions 512L and 512R are in the second posture facing downward, and the decorative portions 512L and 512R are close to the decorative portion 511B. There is.

As shown in FIGS. 24 and 25, when the rotating body 521 further rotates counterclockwise, the connecting shaft 530 moves the elongated hole 531 further to the right, but the right end portion of the elongated hole 531 is formed in an arc shape. Therefore, the first arm member 523 does not rotate. Then, the connecting shaft 530 abuts and presses the first acting portion 537 of the first link member 526. As a result, the first link member 526 rotates clockwise around the rotation shaft 525, so that the second link member 527 opposes the urging force of the tension spring 551 with respect to the second arm portion 523B. It moves toward the second slide position on the rotation shaft 510 side.

As the second link member 527 moves from the first slide position to the second slide position, the second acting portion 539 presses the interlocking shaft 517 of the decorative portion 512R. As a result, the decorative portion 512R rotates clockwise in the front view around the rotation shaft 510, and the decorative portion 512L rotates counterclockwise in the front view around the rotation shaft 510. The protruding piece of 512R changes to the second decorative state away from the decorative portion 511B.

In this way, the effect movable body 500 performs the first operation of descending while rotating from the effect body origin position to the effect body advance position by rotating the connecting shaft 530 of the rotating body 521 by the effect body motor 520. After that, by further rotating the rotating body 521, the connecting shaft 530 acts on the first acting portion 537 of the first link member 526 to rotate the first link member 526, thereby causing the second link member 527 to rotate. A second operation in which the protruding pieces of the decorative portions 512L and 512R rotate in the direction away from the decorative portion 511B by sliding and moving with respect to the second arm portion 523B and the second acting portion 539 interacting with the interlocking shaft 517 of the decorative portion 512R. It is possible to do.

Further, the first link member 526 and the second link member 527 for transmitting the power of the rotating body 521 rotated by the effect body motor 520 to the decorative portions 512L and 512R of the second movable portion 512 are the effect movable body 500. Since the first arm member 523 that is rotatably supported is provided invisible to the player on the back side, the first link member 526 and the second link member 527 are movably guided by the first arm member 523. Therefore, the number of parts can be suitably reduced, and the structure can be simplified to improve the appearance.

Further, the effect movable body 500 is not only rotatable about the rotation shaft 522 by the first arm member 523, but is also rotatable with respect to the first arm member 523 via the rotation shaft 510. By guiding the connecting shaft 503, which is arranged at a position different from that of the rotating shaft 510, to the guide hole 504, the connecting shaft 503 rotates about the rotating shaft 510 in accordance with the rotation of the first arm member 523. Move. Therefore, it is possible to operate a plurality of places by one drive source, and the operation mode of the first operation is complicated, so that the interest is improved.

As shown in FIG. 26, the decorative portion 511B and the decorative portions 512L and 512R are composed of a lens member made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and an LED substrate 519 is provided on the back side of the decorative portion 511B. ing. The effector LED 518A provided on the front surface of the LED substrate 519 is a top-type LED provided so as to be able to irradiate light in a direction perpendicular to or substantially perpendicular to the front surface, that is, toward the front. On the other hand, the effector LED518B provided on the back surface of the LED substrate 519 is an angle type LED capable of irradiating light in a direction parallel to or substantially parallel to the back surface of the LED substrate 519, and the light is directed outward. Is provided so that it can be irradiated.

For example, when a V prize is generated in the small hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect movable body 500 to the effect body advance position and changes to the second decorative state at the effect body advance position. It is possible to make the effector LEDs 518A and 518B emit light at the timing of causing the effect. The light from the effector LED 518A is emitted forward through the lens member, and the light from the effector LED 518B is emitted outward. Therefore, by causing the effector LEDs 518A and 518B to emit light, the front surface of the decorative portion 511B is emitted by the light from the effector LED 518A, and the decorative portion 511B is located outside the decorative portion 511B by the light from the effector LED 518B. The decorative parts 512L and 512R are illuminated and emit light.

As described above, since the light source of the first movable portion 511 can be used to emit light without providing the light source in the decorative portions 512L and 512R that can operate with respect to the first movable portion 511, the number of parts can be reduced. At the same time, wiring from the first movable portion 511 to the second movable portion 512 is not required, so that the structure can be simplified.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 moves the effect movable body 500 from the effect body origin position to the effect body advance position when a V prize is generated in the small hit game state, and from the first decorative state to the first decorative state. 2 The form of changing to the decorative state and emitting light by the effector LEDs 518A and 518B has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect control CPU 120 is controlled to, for example, a small hit game state. When the movable passage body 400 moves to the passage body advance position, the effect movable body 500 moves to the effect body advance position, and when a V prize occurs, the first decorative state is changed to the second decorative state. , The effector LEDs 518A and 518B may be made to emit light. Further, the effect control CPU 120 is in a predetermined effect timing other than the small hit game state (for example, various advance notice effects suggesting the occurrence of a small hit or a big hit, or a big hit notifying that the round game is continued during the effect big hit. The effect movable body 500 may be operated at the effect (execution timing of the suggestion effect or the like suggesting that the effect is controlled to the high base state B which is more advantageous than the high base state A).

Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the movable passage body 400 is arranged on the front side of the effect movable body 500. In other words, the movable passage body 400 and the effect movable body 500 overlap each other in the front view, but the movable range is arranged so as not to overlap in the plan view. Even if the movable body 500 is at an arbitrary position within the movable range, it does not come into contact with the movable passage body 400.

Specifically, when the effect movable body 500 is at the effect body origin position and the movable passage body 400 is at the passage body origin position, the movable passage body 400 and the effect movable body 500 do not come into contact with each other (FIG. 15 (FIG. 15). (See A)), the movable passage body 400 and the effect movable body 500 do not come into contact with each other even when the effect movable body 500 is in the effect body advance position and the movable passage body 400 is in the passage body advance position (FIG. 15 (B)). reference).

Although not shown, the movable passage body 400 and the effect movable body 500 do not come into contact with each other even if the effect movable body 500 is located at an arbitrary position between the effect body origin position and the effect body advance position. That is, since the movable passage body 400 and the effect movable body 500 do not interfere with each other at any timing, the operation of one of the movable passage body 400 and the effect movable body 500 affects the operation of the other. Does not affect. Furthermore, since the movable passage body 400 and the effect movable body 500 are arranged so that the movable range is shifted back and forth and does not overlap, is the second movable portion 402 located at the deployed position or the non-deployed position? Regardless of this, the effect movable body 500 does not interfere with the second movable portion 402.

Further, the first movable portion 401 of the movable passage body 400 is a movable portion operated by the passage body motor 91 connected to the main board 11, and is the first movable portion 511 and the second movable portion 512 of the effect movable body 500. Is a movable part operated by the effect body motor 520 connected to the effect control board 12.

The first movable unit 401 first enters the second large winning opening 702B in the small hit game state, and the game ball P1 stored in the first storage unit 227 is inserted into the V winning opening 283 (by the game ball entering). It is provided with a second guidance path 202A that guides the CPU 103 so as to be able to enter the winning opening) that triggers the CPU 103 to control the jackpot game state. That is, the first movable portion 401 is a movable portion for a game related to a winning / losing lottery for drawing a winning / failing (whether or not to control a big hit), while the first movable portion 511 and the second movable portion 512 are first. Like the movable part 401, it is a movable part for production that is not involved in the winning or losing lottery.

In this way, when the movable passage body 400 and the effect movable body 500 are provided on one base member 450, the operation of both the movable passage body 400 and the effect movable body 500 is controlled by the CPU 103 that controls the game. In this case, the control load of the CPU 103 becomes large, which may affect the game. Therefore, for the moving parts that are not related to the game such as the winning / losing lottery, the operation is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 which is another control means. By doing so, the processing load of the CPU 103 can be suitably reduced.

However, when the movable passage body 400 and the effect movable body 500 for winning / failing lottery are mounted on one base member 450 in this way, the operation of one of the movable passage body 400 and the effect movable body 500 becomes the other operation. If there is an interference, in particular, the movement of the effect movable body 500 may affect the movement of the movable passage body 400, the lottery of success or failure, that is, the result of the game is affected, and the fairness of the game can be maintained. There is a risk that it will disappear. Therefore, it is preferable that the movable passage body 400 and the effect movable body 500 are provided so that one operation does not interfere with the other operation.

(Outline of the progress of the game)
The game ball is launched toward the game area Y by the rotation operation of the ball striking operation handle 30 included in the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started.

In the present embodiment, during the execution period of the previous normal map game, or during the period during which the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in an accessible state (or a difficult-to-enter state in the time after opening, which will be described later). If the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 in the middle (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal map game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), the normal map game based on the passage is not suspended. , It may be reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this fluctuation display of the normal symbol, when a predetermined time, which is the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, elapses after the fluctuation of the normal symbol is started, the confirmed normal symbol which is the variation display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derivated display). At this time, if a specific ordinary symbol (symbol per ordinary symbol) such as a number indicating "7" is stopped and displayed as the confirmed ordinary symbol, the variable display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "per ordinary symbol". In the present embodiment, as the finalized normal symbol, the normal symbol other than the normal symbol, such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating "7", is stopped and displayed, and the variable display result of the normal symbol is "normal". Although it does not result in "figure loss", it may result in "general figure loss". The variable plate moves to the advanced position and the variable winning ball device 6B can enter in response to the change display result of the normal symbol becoming "normal symbol hit", and the variable plate is evacuated after a predetermined time has passed. After moving to the position, the variable winning ball device 6B becomes difficult to enter.

When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the first start winning opening during the period during which the special figure game is being executed or during the period controlled by the big hit game state or the small hit game state described later (first start prize). However, if the first special figure game based on the first start winning cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the first special figure game based on the approach is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4). On the other hand, when the game ball enters (wins) the second start winning opening (when the second start prize occurs but the second special figure game based on the second start prize cannot be executed immediately), the entry is entered. The execution of the second special figure game based on the second special figure game is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 3).

In the special figure game, if a predetermined special symbol (small hit symbol, for example, "2") is stopped and displayed, it becomes "small hit". If a specific special symbol (big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as the finalized special symbol, it may be set to "big hit". .. Further, if a special symbol (missing symbol, for example, "-") different from the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes "missing".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes "small hit", it is controlled to the small hit game state. After the display result in the special figure game becomes "big hit", it may be controlled to the big hit game state as an advantageous state advantageous for the player.

In the small hit game state, the second large winning opening 702B formed by the second special variable winning ball device 7B is in a state in which the player can enter in a predetermined open mode. In the small hit game state, the second large winning opening door 702A of the second special variable winning ball device 7B wins a predetermined number (for example, eight) or a period until a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 1800 ms) elapses. The second big winning opening 702B is opened in the period until the ball is generated. As a result, the second special variable winning ball device 7B is in an advantageous state for the player.

In the small hit game state, when the game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 702B passes through the third count switch 24B provided in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, the third count switch 24B of the game ball It becomes a "big hit (V winning big hit)" based on the passage. That is, the CPU 103 controls the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the third count switch 24B of the gaming ball. On the other hand, when the game ball that has won the second big winning opening 702B in the small hit game state passes through the fourth count switch 24C provided in the second special variable winning ball device 7B, it does not become a "big hit". That is, the CPU 103 does not control the gaming state to the jackpot gaming state based on the detection of the passage of the fourth count switch 24C of the gaming ball.

Then, when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch 24B of the game ball, the first big prize opening door 701A of the first special variable winning ball device 7A is set to a predetermined upper limit time (for example, 29 seconds). ) Elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 8) of prizes are awarded, the first large winning opening 701B is opened. As a result, a round game is executed in which the first special variable winning ball device 7A is opened in an open state which is advantageous for the player. In the present embodiment, the first special variable winning ball device 7A is controlled to the open state when the big hit game state is controlled based on the passage of the third count switch 24B of the game ball. The present invention is not limited to this, and the second special variable winning ball device 7B may be controlled in an open state.

The round, which is the opening cycle of the first winning opening, can be repeatedly executed until the number of executions reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "5", "7", or "10"). Even before the number of times the round is executed reaches the upper limit, the execution of the round is completed when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the game ball did not win the first prize opening). May be good.

After the end of the jackpot game state in the present embodiment, the time reduction control (time reduction control) is performed to control the time reduction state. In the time saving state, control (time saving control) is executed in which the average special figure fluctuation time (period in which the special figure is changed) is shortened as compared with the normal state. In the time saving state, the average fluctuation time of the normal map (the period during which the normal map is changed) is shortened from the normal state, and the probability of becoming a "normal map hit" in the normal map game is improved from the normal state. Controls (high opening control, high base control) that make it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening are also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of the special symbol (particularly the second special symbol) is improved, which is advantageous for the player.

The time saving state is determined by the end condition of either that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 99 times) or that the small hit has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or three times). Continue until it is established first. A game whose end condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also referred to as a number-cutting (time-cutting time reduction, etc.).

The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as a big hit game state, a small hit game state, or a short time state, which is advantageous for the player, and the display result in the normal figure game is "normal figure hit". The probability of becoming a "small hit" and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "small hit" are determined by performing a predetermined return process after the power is turned on, such as in the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed). It is in the same controlled state as (when not executed). The state in which the time saving control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state in which the time saving control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state.

If the big hit game state is not reached after the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed and the game state before the special figure game display result becomes "small hit" is continuously controlled. NS. The game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. For example, after the game ball passes through a specific area and is controlled to the big hit game state, it is controlled to the high base state (time saving state).

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects of notifying the progress of the game and enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, and in addition to or instead of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning off the points and the like, operating the effect movable body 500, and the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" provided in the image display device 5, the first special figure game or the first special figure game or the first 2 In response to the start of the special figure game, the variable display of the decorative pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as the finalized special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the final decorative symbol (combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. ) Is also displayed (derived) as a stop.

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", a fixed decorative symbol (for example, "for example," 1 3 5 ”etc.) Is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a“ small hit ”). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eyes are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right".

When the display result of the special figure game is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode, and the variable display result of the decorative symbol is a fixed decorative symbol of a non-reach combination ("" (Also referred to as "non-reach loss") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is a predetermined reach combination ("reach loss") that is not a small hit combination. The fixed decorative symbol (also called "") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol may be "reach loss").

The effect that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute includes displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (hold display or active display). Further, as another effect, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the small hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol. The advance notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the small hit reliability in the variable display during execution and a look-ahead advance notice effect for notifying the small hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display in which execution is suspended). .. As the look-ahead notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the usual mode may be executed.

Further, in the image display device 5, one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays by temporarily stopping the decorative symbol during the variable display of the decorative symbol and then restarting the variable display. The pseudo-continuous production may be executed.

Even during the big hit game state, the big hit middle effect that notifies the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit middle effect, an effect of notifying the number of rounds and a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small hit game state, the small hit medium effect for notifying the small hit game state is executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned game in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of a special figure game (including management of hold), execution of a normal figure game (including management of hold), and a big hit. It has a function to control a gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , A random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided.

The CPU 103 performs a process of controlling the progress of the game (a process of realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing the program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as a fluctuation pattern described later, an effect control command described later, and various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. .. The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which the stored contents are stored for a predetermined period even if a part or all of the RAM 102 is stopped from supplying power to the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The game random number may be one that is updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (one that is updated by software).

The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, ordinary symbol display 20, first hold). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting (a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, etc., a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 is a detection signal (a game ball passes or is passed) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). (A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. By transmitting the detection signal, the passage or approach of the game ball is detected.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for a prize-winning door. To transmit.

The main board 11 (microcomputer 100 for game control) issues an effect control command (command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as a part of controlling the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type)) and a variation pattern used when executing a special figure game (details will be described later). )), The game status (for example, the start and end of the variable display, the opening status of the large winning opening, the occurrence of winning, the number of stored memories, the game status), the command for specifying the occurrence of an error, and the like are included.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives an effect control command, and produces an effect (various effects according to the progress of the game) based on the received effect control command. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 500, error notification, and notification of power failure recovery).

The effect control board 12 is equipped with an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 is a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 by executing the program stored in the ROM 121 (a process for realizing the above-mentioned function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed). (Including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A or the push sensor 35B (a signal output when an operation by the player is detected and an appropriate signal indicating the operation content). It may also instruct the control unit 123.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes the effect based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 supplies the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120, so that the effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the output voice) to the voice control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or, a lamp signal (a signal for designating a lamp lighting / extinguishing mode) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the effect movable body 500 to the effect movable body 500 or a drive circuit for driving the effect movable body 500.

The voice control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let me.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a mode designated by the lamp signal. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 controls the sound output, the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp (supply of sound designation signal and lamp signal, etc.), and the control of the effect movable body 500 (supply of the signal for operating the effect movable body 500, etc.). You may want to do it.

The random number circuit 124 updatablely counts numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for effect) used to execute various effects. The effect random number may be one that is updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal) and an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11. It is configured to include the output port of.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, the first byte represents MODE (command classification), and the second byte represents EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". The command form shown in FIG. 27A is an example, and other command forms may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 27 (A), the command 8001H is the first variable display start command for designating the start of the variable display in the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. The command 8002H is a second variable display start command for designating the start of variable display in the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) such as a symbol (also referred to as an effect symbol). Here, XXH indicates that it is an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the content of instruction by the effect control command. In the variation pattern specification command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be specified.

The command 8CXXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 27 (B), the determination result (predetermined result) of whether the variable display result (also referred to as the variable display result) is “miss” or “small hit”. Alternatively, different EXT data are set according to the determination result (small hit type determination result) of which of the plurality of small hit types is used when the variable display result is "small hit".

In the variable display result designation command, for example, as shown in FIG. 27 (B), the command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “missing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit 1" and the small hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit 2" and the small hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit 3" and the small hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit 4" and the small hit type determination result. The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit 5" and the small hit type determination result. The command 8C06H is a seventh variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit 6" and the small hit type determination result. The command 8C07H is the eighth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit 7" and the small hit type determination result. The command 8C08H is a ninth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result and the small hit type determination result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit 8". The command 8C09H is the tenth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit 9" and the small hit type determination result. The command 8C0AH is the eleventh variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit 10" and the small hit type determination result. The command 8C0BH is a twelfth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit 11" and the small hit type determination result. The command 8C0CH is the thirteenth variable display result designation command for notifying the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "small hit" and the small hit type is "small hit 12" and the small hit type determination result.

The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the change stop (confirmation) of the decorative symbol in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a game state designation command for designating the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data are set according to, for example, the current game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is the first game state specification command corresponding to the game state (low base state, normal state) in which the time reduction control is not performed, and the command 9501H is the game state (high) in which the time reduction control is performed once. The second game state specification command corresponding to the base state A and the time reduction state A) is used, and the command 9502H is used as the third game state specification command corresponding to the game state (high base state B, time reduction state B) in which the time reduction control is performed three times. And.

The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command that specifies the occurrence of an error (abnormality) and the type of the error (abnormality) that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormality) designation command, for example, by setting the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormality), it is specified which error (abnormality) has been determined on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by the error notification process.

The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a notification command during the opening of the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit game state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that it is a period during which the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit game state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit. The command A4XXH is a promotion effect start designation command that specifies the start of the promotion effect described later.

In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set according to the pre-determination result and the jackpot type determination result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result specification command. .. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. .. In the notification command during the opening of the large winning opening and the notification command after opening the large winning opening, for example, the number of round executions (for example, "1" to "16") in the normal open big hit state and the high-speed open big hit state, which will be described later, is supported. Different EXT data are set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and the starting winning (first starting winning) is generated. This is a first start opening winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A has been satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and the starting winning (second starting winning) is generated. , The second start opening winning designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B has been satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first hold storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The command C2XXH is a second hold storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure hold storage number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure hold storage number. The first hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning opening and the first starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second hold memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening prize designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second starting condition is satisfied. , Is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Further, the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command are used in the special figure game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the hold storage number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first hold storage number notification command and the second hold storage number notification command, the total hold storage number notification command for notifying the total hold storage number may be transmitted. That is, a total hold storage number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) of the total hold storage number.

The command D100 is a V winning notification designation command for notifying that a V winning has occurred, that is, that the third count switch 24B has been turned on because the game ball has passed through the third count switch 24B.

The command shown in FIG. 27 (A) is an example, and may not have a part of these commands, or a different command may be used instead of these commands, or these commands may be used. You may add a command different from. For example, a prize ball number notification command for making it possible to specify the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of a game ball at each winning opening, or a gate for notifying that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times that the probability change control or the time reduction control is executed, or the like may be provided.

FIG. 28 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the side of the main board 11. As shown in FIG. 28, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and the usual Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the figure display result is controlled so as to be countable. In addition, a random number value other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating a part or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 is disturbed by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown) shown in FIG. 28. Numerical data indicating a part of the numerical values MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a "small hit" to the big hit game state. For example, it takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type to be one of "small hits 1 to 10" when the variable display result is "small hits", for example, "0". It takes a value in the range of "to" 299 ".

The random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is a random value used to determine the fluctuation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any of a plurality of types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to "1" to "". It takes a value in the range of 997.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal figure game by the normal symbol display 20 is "per normal figure" or "missing normal figure". It is a random number value to be obtained, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "23", for example.

FIG. 29 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a variation pattern of a special symbol. In the present embodiment, a fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "missing" and a plurality of fluctuation patterns (PB2-1) corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit". , PB2-2, PB2-3, PB2-4) are prepared in advance.

The special figure variable display time of a plurality of fluctuation patterns (PB2-1, PB2-2, PB2-3, PB2-4) is set longer than the fluctuation pattern (PA1-1) corresponding to the case of "loss". Has been done. Further, in the high base state B that continues until the time reduction control is executed three times after the end of the big hit, the fluctuation time is longer than in the case of the high base state A that continues until the time reduction control is executed once after the end of the big hit. The variation pattern PB2-4 is set to be executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (A), as the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol in the low base state or the high base states A and B, when the display result is lost, the loss fluctuation pattern PB1-1 If the display result is a small hit, the small hit fluctuation pattern PB2-1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 29 (B), as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the low base state, the small hit fluctuation pattern PB2-2 is determined when the display result is a small hit. As shown in FIG. 29 (C), as the fluctuation pattern of the second special symbol in the high base state A, when the display result is a small hit and the number of reserved storages of the special symbol is 2 to 4, the small hit fluctuation pattern PB2-1 is determined, and when the display result is a small hit and the number of reserved storages in the special figure is 0 to 1, the small hit fluctuation pattern PB2-3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 29 (D), the small hit variation pattern PB2-4 is determined as the variation pattern of the second special symbol in the high base state B.

In the present embodiment, for the fluctuation patterns PB1-1 and PB2-1 to 4, the symbol determination time (minimum stop display time of the special symbol) is common to the low base state and the high base states A and B. It is said to be 500 ms. Further, a fluctuation pattern other than the above fluctuation pattern may be set, and the fluctuation time of each fluctuation pattern can be arbitrarily changed.

FIG. 30A shows a configuration example of a special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state before the definite special symbol is derived and displayed, based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is a table referenced by.

In the special figure display result determination table in the present embodiment, either the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is used. Depending on whether the game is a special figure game, a numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table, when the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A More judgment values than at one time are assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit". As a result, in the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the special figure display result is displayed when the special figure game uses the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. Compared to the probability that it is determined to control the small hit game state as "small hit" (1/70 in the present embodiment), it is determined that the special figure display result is controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit". The probability is high (1/1 in this embodiment). That is, the second special figure game is a game having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first special figure game.

If the second special figure game has a higher degree of advantage for the player than the first special figure game, the small hit probability of the second special figure game varies from 1/2 to 1/5. It can be changed, and the special figure display result may be "lost" with a predetermined probability in the second special figure game. Further, even when the special figure display result of the second special figure game includes "miss" in this way, the second special figure game has a "small hit" of the special figure display result than the first special figure game. It is preferable that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state is high.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30B, in the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the first start winning opening during the period during the execution of the previous special figure game or the like (the game ball passes the first start winning prize). If the special figure game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately after passing through the mouth), the special figure game based on the passage is suspended up to the predetermined first upper limit number (for example, 4), and the previous special figure game is executed. If the game ball passes through the second start winning opening during the middle period (when the game ball passes through the second starting winning opening but the special figure game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), it is based on the passage. The special figure game is held up to a predetermined second upper limit number (for example, 3).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the CPU 103 has the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory, the CPU 103 displays the variable display of the second special figure based on the second reserved memory and the first special figure based on the first reserved memory. It is designed to be executed with priority over the variable display of.

Further, as shown in FIG. 30C, in the present embodiment, the end conditions of the high base state A executed after the end of the big hit are the special figure game using the first special figure after the end of the big hit and the first special figure game. 2 The total variable display number with the special figure game using the special figure has reached 99 times, or the number of times the small hit game state has been executed after the end of the big hit (of the second special figure game in the high base state A). It is established by either of the fact that the number of executions (the number of executions) reaches the first number (for example, once). On the other hand, the end condition of the high base state B executed after the end of the big hit is the total variable display number of the special figure game using the first special figure and the special figure game using the second special figure after the end of the big hit. It has reached 99 times, or the number of times the small hit game state has been executed after the end of the big hit (the number of times the second special figure game has been executed in the high base state B) has reached the second number (for example, 3 times). , Whichever is true. The high base states A and B also end when the jackpot game state is controlled.

Further, the number of times the special figure game, which is the end condition of the high base states A and B, is executed is not limited to the above 99 times, and can be arbitrarily changed. Further, the number of times may be different between the high base state A and the high base state B. Further, the number of executions of the small hit game state, which is the end condition of the high base states A and B, is not limited to the above one or three times, and can be arbitrarily changed.

FIG. 31 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table A stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table A is a random number (MR4) for determining the hit type when the special figure game using the first special figure is executed in the low base state and it is determined that the display result is a small hit. ), Which is a table referred to for determining the type of small hit to one of small hit 1 to small hit 4. In the small hit type determination table A in the present embodiment, out of the range 0 to 299 that the random number (MR4) for determining the hit type can take, 0 to 134 is small hit 1, 135 to 269 is small. Hits 2,270 to 289 are assigned to small hits 3, and 290 to 299 are assigned to small hits 4.

FIG. 31B is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table B stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table B is used for determining the hit type when the special figure game using the first special figure is executed in the high base states A and B and it is determined that the display result is a small hit. It is a table referred to for determining the type of small hit to one of small hit 1 to small hit 4 based on a random number (MR4). In the small hit type determination table B in the present embodiment, out of the range 0 to 299 that the random number (MR4) for determining the hit type can take, 0 to 134 is small hit 1, 135 to 269 is small. Hits 2,270 to 289 are assigned to small hits 3, and 290 to 299 are assigned to small hits 4.

FIG. 31 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table C stored in the ROM 101. The small hit type determination table C is a hit when a special figure game using the second special figure is executed in the low base state or the high base states A and B and it is determined that the display result is a small hit. It is a table referred to for determining the type of a small hit to one of 5 to 10 small hits based on a random number (MR4) for determining the type. In the small hit type determination table C in the present embodiment, out of the range 0 to 299 that the random number (MR4) for determining the hit type can be taken, 0 to 39 are small hits and 40 to 89 are small. Hits 6, 90 to 99 are small hits 7, 110 to 129 are small hits 8, 130 to 179 are small hits 9, 180 to 239 are small hits 10, 240 to 259 are small hits 11,260 to Up to 299 are assigned to the small hit 12.

In the present embodiment, the small hits 1, 3, 5, and 9 have the largest number of support balls on the rotating body 208 by opening the second large winning opening 702B once based on the opening pattern A in the small hit game state. It is possible to supply one at. Further, in the small hits 2, 4, 6, and 10, the second large winning opening 702B is opened twice based on the opening pattern B in the small hit game state, so that a maximum of three support balls are supplied to the rotating body 208. It will be possible. Further, in the small hits 7 and 11, the second big winning opening 702B is opened three times based on the opening pattern C in the small hit game state, so that a maximum of five support balls can be supplied to the rotating body 208. Further, in the small hits 8 and 12, the second big winning opening 702B is opened once based on the opening pattern D in the small hit game state, so that a maximum of one support ball can be supplied to the rotating body 208. Later, after the support balls are discharged, the rotating body 208 can be supplied with a maximum of one support ball by opening the support ball once more.

In the present embodiment, control is performed in which a short-time opening of 148 ms is repeated two or three times at 600 ms intervals in one opening. That is, in the opening pattern A, the opening control that repeats the short-time opening of 148 ms three times is executed once (see FIG. 50), and in the opening pattern B, the opening control that repeats the short-time opening of 148 ms three times is executed twice. (See FIG. 51), in the opening pattern C, the opening control in which the short-time opening of 148 ms is repeated twice is executed three times (see FIG. 52). In the opening pattern D, the opening control of repeating the short-time opening of 148 ms three times is executed once (see FIG. 50), the support ball is discharged, and then the short-time opening of 148 ms is repeated three times. The release control is executed once (see FIGS. 55 and 56).

It should be noted that the short-time opening may be repeated two or four times or more in one opening, or the opening for a time corresponding to the total time of the plurality of short-time opening may be executed once. Further, when the door is opened for a short time of 148 ms, one game ball P on the upper surface of the second big winning door 702A can enter, but when the door is opened, a plurality of game balls P can enter the second big winning door 702A. When the upper surface is flowing down, a plurality of game balls P may win a prize at the time of opening.

Further, in the small hits 1 to 4, when the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B during the small hit game, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit A in which the round game is executed 7 times is executed. Will be done. Regarding small hits 1 and 2, when a small hit is made in the low base state, it is controlled to the high base state A after the end of the big hit game state, and the small hit is made in the high base states A and B. In this case, it is controlled to the high base state B after the end of the big hit game state. Regarding the small hits 3 and 4, even if a small hit occurs in the low base state or the high base states A and B, it is controlled to the high base state B after the end of the big hit game state.

Further, in the small hits 5 to 8, when the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B during the small hit game, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit C in which the round game is executed 5 times is executed. Will be done. Further, in the small hits 9 to 12, when the game ball passes through the third count switch 24B during the small hit game, that is, when the V winning big hit occurs, the big hit D in which the round game is executed 10 times is executed. Will be done. Since the number of rounds of each jackpot A to D is one round at the time of V winning, the actual number of rounds is a value obtained by subtracting the V winning round from the specified number of rounds.

Further, regarding the small hits 5 to 12, even if a small hit occurs in the low base state or the high base states A and B, the small hit is controlled to the high base state B after the end of the big hit game state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a big hit is triggered by a small hit in the first special figure game in the low base state, after the big hit ends, the high base state A is set at a higher rate than the high base state B. While being controlled, if a big hit is triggered by a small hit in the first special figure game or the second special figure game in the high base states A and B, the rate is higher than that in the high base state A after the big hit ends. It is controlled to the high base state B.

That is, in the case of the low base state, the probability of becoming a big hit and the probability of being controlled to the high base state B after the end of the big hit are low, but when the small hit becomes a big hit in the second special figure game in the high base state A, it becomes a big hit. After the big hit, all are controlled to the high base state B, which has more time reductions than the high base state A, so the probability of becoming a big hit in the second special figure game is increased, so the big hit consecutive villa Can be expected.

In the present embodiment, when a big hit is triggered by a small hit in the first special figure game in the low base state, it is controlled to either the high base state A or the high base state B depending on the small hit type. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a big hit is triggered by a small hit in the first special figure game in the low base state, it is controlled to the high base state A regardless of the small hit type. It may be done. Further, in the second special figure game in the high base states A and B, when a big hit is triggered by a small hit, a mode in which the high base state B is controlled regardless of the small hit type is illustrated. Or may be controlled to a low base state.

Further, in the present embodiment, all of the high base states A and B are controlled after the end of the big hit, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the low base is used after the end of the big hit. It may have a small hit type controlled by the state.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is controlled to either a high base state A that continues until the time saving control is executed once after the end of the big hit, or a high base state B that continues until the time saving control is executed three times. Although the embodiment having the small hit types 1 to 12 has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is controlled to either a high base state that continues until the time saving control is executed twice or four times or more. It may have a small hit type.

FIG. 32 (A) shows a variation pattern of a normal symbol determined in a low base state. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern PC1-1 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "per ordinary figure" is prepared in advance, and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "missing ordinary figure" is not prepared. In the fluctuation pattern PC1-1, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is 3000 ms, and the symbol confirmation time (minimum stop display time of the normal symbol) is 4 ms.

FIG. 32 (B) shows the variation pattern of the normal symbol determined in the high base states A and B. In the present embodiment, the variation pattern PC1-2 corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "per ordinary figure" is prepared in advance, and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "missing ordinary figure" is not prepared. In the fluctuation pattern PC1-2, the fluctuation display time of the normal symbol is 48 ms, and the symbol confirmation time (minimum stop display time of the normal symbol) is 4 ms. That is, the fluctuation display time of the normal figure is shorter in the high base states A and B than in the low base state, but the symbol determination time is common to the low base states and the high base states A and B.

FIG. 32 (C) shows the opening contents of the second start winning opening based on the normal drawing. If the game state is in a low base state at the opening timing (timing when the normal drawing is stopped and displayed) to open the second starting winning opening based on the normal drawing, the opening time of the second starting winning opening is 16 ms and is open. The post-time (the period during which the variable winning ball device 6B is maintained in a difficult-to-enter state) is 4048 ms. On the other hand, when the game state is the high base states A and B at the opening timing (the timing when the normal drawing is stopped and displayed) to open the second starting winning opening based on the hit of the normal drawing, the opening of the second starting winning opening The time is 5500 ms, and the time after opening (the period during which the variable winning ball device 6B is maintained in a difficult-to-enter state) is 4048 ms.

FIG. 32 (D) shows a configuration example of a normal map display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, the variable winning ball device 6B sets the variable display result as "per normal figure" before the definite normal symbol, which is the variable display result in the normal figure game, is derived and displayed as the normal figure display result determination table. This is a table that is referred to for determining whether or not to control the game so that it can enter, based on the random number value MR4 for determining the result of displaying a general map.

In the normal map display result determination table in the present embodiment, it is compared with the random number value MR4 for determining the normal map display result according to whether the game state is the low base state or the high base state A or B. All numerical values (judgment values) are assigned to the display result of "per ordinary figure". That is, in the present embodiment, even if the gaming state is the low base state or the high base states A and B, the normal map display result is set to a predetermined probability (1/1 in the present embodiment) in the normal map game. ) To control the variable winning ball device 6B so that it can enter.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an embodiment in which the normal figure display result is hit by the normal figure with a probability of 1/1 in the normal figure game is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above is not limited to this. It may be possible to determine the hit of the normal figure with a probability lower than the probability, that is, to determine the "loss of the normal figure".

FIG. 32 (E) shows various determination contents in the normal drawing game. In the present embodiment, when the variable display start condition of the normal figure is satisfied based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the gate switch 21, whether the game state is the low base state or the high base states A and B. Depending on the situation, it is decided whether or not to hit the normal map (actually, to hit the normal map) and the fluctuation pattern of the normal map.

On the other hand, regarding the opening pattern (opening time) of the second start winning opening, the short opening pattern (16 ms) is obtained when the game state is the low base state at the timing when the display result of the variable display of the normal figure game is derived and displayed. Is determined, and when the gaming states are the high base states A and B, the long open pattern (5500 ms) is determined.

In this way, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the normal map display result of the normal map game is a normal map hit, and the normal map fluctuation pattern at the timing when the variable display start condition of the normal map is satisfied. 2 Regarding the opening pattern (opening time) of the starting winning opening, the game state is in the low base state and the high base state at the timing when the display result of the variable display of the normal figure game is derived and displayed (the symbol per normal figure is stopped and displayed). It is determined by whether it is A or B.

Further, as for the closing condition of the second starting winning opening, regardless of whether the second starting winning opening is opened in the short opening pattern or the long opening pattern, the opening time has elapsed since the second starting winning opening was opened. It is established based on either that, or two game balls have won a prize (detected by the second start port switch 22B) even before the opening time has elapsed, and the variable winning ball device 6B is established. It is controlled to be difficult to enter. In the present embodiment, the variable winning ball device 6B is controlled to be in a difficult-to-enter state by winning two game balls, but one or three or more game balls have won a prize. As a result, the variable winning ball device 6B may be controlled to be in a difficult-to-enter state.

Further, the normal drawing confirmation time (4 ms), the second start winning opening opening time (16 ms or 5500 ms), the opening time (4048 ms), and the like can be variously changed, limited to the above time.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operation of main board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 33, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output ports, etc.), settings for making the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on the power supply board, for example. When the power is turned on with the clear switch turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), the initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether or not the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stop of the power supply. In this power supply stop processing, a processing of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up to the RAM 102, a data protection processing of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes addition of an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags, various timer states, etc.) for advancing the game, as well as the state of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (used by using an error detection code) and determines whether or not the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, the parity bit and the checksum are used to determine whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped. When it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the stored contents (contents of the backed up data) of the RAM 102. As a result, the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped, and if the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is restarted from the state before the restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. Will be.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command instructing recovery from the power failure to the effect control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, the effect control command that specifies the game state before the power failure that is backed up, and the effect control that specifies the display result of the special figure game that is being executed when the special figure game is being executed. You may want to send a command. For these commands, the same commands that are set to be transmitted in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the recovery from the power failure has been performed or the recovery from the power failure is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The effect control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the effect control command.

After the restoration process or the initialization process is completed and the effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer is interrupted periodically every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and interrupts are permitted (step S12). ). After that, the loop processing is started. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 34. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 34 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to perform the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port via the switch circuit 110. It is determined whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, the jackpot information (information indicating the number of times the jackpot has occurred) and the start information (starting) supplied to the hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. Data such as information indicating the number of times of winning (information indicating the number of times of winning, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times of probability change state, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process process (step S25). By executing the special symbol process process for each timer interrupt by the CPU 103, it is possible to manage the execution and hold of the special symbol game, control the big hit game state and the small hit game state, control the game state, and the like (for details, refer to the details. See below).

Following the special symbol process processing, the normal symbol process processing is executed (step S26). By executing the normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, the CPU 103 manages the execution and hold of the normal figure game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball through the passing gate 41). It enables opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on "per-figure hit". The execution of the normal figure game is performed by driving the normal symbol display 20.

After executing the normal symbol process process, as a part of the game control timer interrupt process, a process when a power failure occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes the command control process (step S27). The CPU 103 may send and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 34 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes the start winning prize determination process (step S101).

In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting the occurrence of a start winning, storing the hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold storage number is executed. When the start winning is generated, the display result (including the jackpot type) and the random value for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted and stored as hold information. Further, a process of pre-reading and determining a display result or a fluctuation pattern may be executed based on the extracted random number value. After the hold information and the number of hold storages are stored, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for specifying the determination result such as the generation of the start winning prize, the number of hold storages, and the look-ahead determination is made on the effect control board 12. .. The effect control command at the time of starting winning, which is set to be transmitted in this way, is executed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 34 after the special symbol process process is completed. Is transmitted to.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, a transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special figure game or the second special figure game based on the presence or absence of the pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is set to "big hit" or "small hit" based on the random value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when the display result is set to "big hit". Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a big hit symbol, a small hit symbol, or a lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the winning order of the game balls to the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be memorized, and the starting condition of the special figure game may be satisfied in the winning order (also referred to as winning order digestion).

When making various determinations based on the random number value, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (a table in which the determination value to be compared with the random number value is assigned to the determination result) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this fluctuation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns is set using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". The process of deciding on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The fluctuation pattern includes the execution time of the special symbol game (special symbol fluctuation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbol), the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbol (presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display of the decorative symbol. It specifies the content of the effect (type of reach effect, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. In this special symbol change processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are set to change the special symbol, and the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It includes processing to measure. In addition, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the fluctuation of the special symbol, and stop display (derive) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. Contains the process of making settings for. Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is "missing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "miss", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of cuts is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot release preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting to start the execution of the round in the big hit game state and open the big winning opening based on the display result being "big hit". It has been. When the large winning opening is opened, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, the upper limit period for opening the big winning opening and the upper limit number of executions for the round are set according to which type of jackpot is used. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing ends.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. It includes a process of determining whether or not it is time to return the device from the open state to the closed state. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6" after executing a process of stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door. End the processing while the jackpot is open.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round that opens the jackpot has reached the set maximum number of executions, and a jackpot game state when the maximum number of executions is reached. It includes processing to make settings to terminate. Then, when the number of round executions has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of round executions reaches the upper limit, the special figure process flag is set. The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the post-launch processing is completed.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this jackpot end process, there is a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending effect as an effect action for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing to make various settings to start control and time reduction control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end processing ends.

The small hit release preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This small hit pre-opening process includes a process of setting the large winning opening to be open in the small hit game state based on the display result being "small hit". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small hit opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In this small hit opening process, it is the timing to measure the elapsed time from the opening state of the big winning opening and to return the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing to determine whether or not it is. When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the processing during the small hit opening process ends.

The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. The small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small hit end process ends.

(Control example of the second special variable winning ball device 7B in the small hit game state)
Next, the control contents when the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S118 to S120 in the small hit game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 (A) to 36 (D). 36A and 36B are diagrams showing a control pattern of a second special variable winning ball device, FIG. 36B is a description showing the contents of the first control and the second control, and FIG. 36C is a description showing a control flow of the first pattern. FIG. 6D is an explanatory diagram showing a control flow of the second pattern.

As shown in FIGS. 36 (A) and 36 (B), the CPU 103 controls according to the small hit type in the small hit game state. Specifically, the upper limit of the support ball is one small hit 1, 3, 5, 9, the upper limit of the support ball is three small hits 2, 4, 6, 10, and the upper limit of the support ball is five small hits. In the case of hits 7 and 11, the second special variable winning ball device 7B is controlled based on the first pattern, and in the case of the upper limit of the support ball of 1 + 1 small hits 8 and 12, it is based on the second pattern. Controls the second special variable winning ball device 7B.

The first pattern is a pattern for executing the first control for allowing the game ball to enter the second special winning opening 702B, and the second pattern is a pattern for playing a game in the second big winning opening 702B after performing the first control. This is a pattern in which the second control is performed so that the ball can enter again. The control contents of the first control and the second control are mainly (1) opening of the second grand prize opening 702B (control of the third solenoid 83), and (2) storage and release of the game ball in the first storage mechanism 204. (Control of the 4th solenoid 84), (3) Storage and release of the game ball in the 2nd storage mechanism 205 (Control of the 5th solenoid 85), (4) Advancement and evacuation of the movable passage body 400 (Motor 91 for the passage body) , Control of the passage body origin position sensor 92 and the passage body advance position sensor 93), (5) Discharge of the support ball (control of the sixth solenoid 86).

Of these, (1) is an open control of the second special winning opening 702B, and (2) to (5) are guidance routes through which the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 702B can pass (for example, the first). It is a storage mechanism control composed of accessories provided in the induction path 201, the second induction path 202A, 202B, the third induction path 203A, 203B, etc.). The open control is executed based on a different pattern depending on the small hit type, whereas the storage mechanism control is executed based on a pattern common to all small hits regardless of the small hit type.

Explaining the flow of control based on the first pattern corresponding to the small hits 1 to 7 and 9 to 11 based on FIG. 36 (C), the CPU 103 performs the first control (small hit) with the start of the small hit game state. The opening control of (1) above based on the process data for opening control corresponding to the type, and the storage mechanism control of (2) to (5) above based on the process data for controlling the storage mechanism common to all small hit types). Start. Then, after the release control is completed, the storage of the game ball (game ball) of the first storage mechanism 204 is released, it is determined whether or not the game ball (game ball) has entered the V winning opening 283, and then the support is provided. When the ejection of the ball is completed, the first control is terminated, and the small hit game state is terminated accordingly. In the opening control in the first control, the second large winning opening 702B is opened a number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times) according to the small hit type.

It should be noted that the CPU 103 continuously executes the storage mechanism control from the end of discharging the support balls until the number of approaching balls entering the second large winning opening 702B and the number of ejected balls (number of entering and exiting balls) match. .. If the number of approaching balls and the number of ejected balls (number of entering and exiting balls) do not match even after a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds) has passed from the ejection of the support balls, it is determined that an ejection error is made and the game is stopped. ..

On the other hand, the flow of control based on the second pattern corresponding to the small hits 8 and 12 will be described with reference to FIG. 36 (D). Start the above-mentioned opening control (1) based on the corresponding opening control process data, and the above-mentioned storage mechanism control (2) to (5) based on the storage mechanism control process data common to all small hit types). .. Then, after the opening of the first second large winning opening 702B was completed, the storage of the game ball (game ball) of the first storage mechanism 204 was released, and the game ball (game ball) entered the V winning opening 283. After determining whether or not, the first control is terminated when the discharge of the support ball is completed. In the opening control in the first control, the second winning opening 702B is opened once.

Next, the CPU 103 performs the second control (the opening control of the above (1) based on the opening control process data corresponding to the small hit type, and the above (2) based on the storage mechanism control process data common to all the small hit types. )-(5) Storage mechanism control) is started. Then, after the completion of the opening of the second large winning opening 702B for the second time, the storage of the game ball (game ball) of the first storage mechanism 204 was released, and the game ball (game ball) entered the V winning opening 283. After determining whether or not, the second control is terminated when the discharge of the support ball is completed. In the opening control in the second control, the second winning opening 702B is opened once.

In this way, in the case of small hits 1 to 7, 9 to 11, the CPU 103 opens the second large winning opening 702B the number of times (for example, 1 to 3 times) according to the small hit type, so that the game ball that has entered is V. A second special variable winning ball device based on the first pattern in which the first control is performed until all the game balls that have entered the second major winning opening 702B are discharged after determining whether or not the winning opening 283 has been entered. Control 7B.

On the other hand, in the case of small hits 8 and 12, whether or not the game ball that entered by opening the second large winning opening 702B the number of times (for example, once) according to the small hit type entered the V winning opening 283 is determined. After the determination, the first control is performed until all the game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 702B are discharged, and then the second large winning opening 702B is again subjected to the number of times according to the small hit type (for example, 1). (Times) After determining whether or not the game ball that entered by opening has entered the V winning opening 283, the second control is performed until all the game balls that have entered the second major winning opening 702B are discharged. The second special variable winning ball device 7B is controlled based on one pattern.

Then, in the second pattern, the case where the game ball (game ball) enters the V winning opening 283 in the first control and the case where the game ball (game ball) does not enter the V winning opening 283 in the first control. In either case, that is, the second control is executed regardless of whether or not a V prize has occurred.

That is, since the small hits 1, 3, 5, 9 and the small hits 8 and 12 are small hits in which the second big winning opening 702B is opened once in the first control, the player performs the first control. In this case, it is difficult to determine whether the small hit type is small hit 1, 3, 5, 9 or small hit 8, 12. Therefore, even if the player performs the first control based on the first pattern corresponding to the small hits 1, 3, 5, and 9, the first control is performed based on the first pattern corresponding to the small hits 8 and 12. You can expect it to be done. That is, since it can be expected that the second control is performed after the first control (the second opening of the second grand prize opening 702B is performed), the interest of the game is improved.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 36 (C) and 36 (D), the first pattern corresponding to the small hits 1 to 7 and 9 to 11 corresponds to the small hits 8 and 12 while only the first control is executed. In the second pattern to be performed, since the second control is executed after the first control, the period during which the small hits 8 and 12 are controlled to the small hit gaming state is controlled more than the cases of the small hits 1 to 7, 9 to 11. Becomes longer.

Therefore, regarding the open control, in the case of small hits 8 and 12, there are two chances of winning or losing lottery in which the game ball can enter the V winning opening 283, once in the first control and once in the second control. Therefore, the open control process data having a longer execution period than the small hits 1 to 7 and 9 to 11 is used.

On the other hand, regarding the storage mechanism control, the process data for controlling the storage mechanism used in the case of the small hits 8 and 12 is also used in the case of the small hits 1 to 7, 9 to 11. That is, common storage mechanism control process data corresponding to all small hit types is used, and in the case of small hits 1 to 7, 9 to 11, the storage mechanism control is terminated when the game ball is normally discharged. It is designed to do. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from easily distinguishing the small hit type due to the difference in the operation mode of the various storage mechanisms, and it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of storage mechanism control process data according to the small hit type. Since the process data for controlling the storage mechanism can be used for all small hits, the data capacity of the ROM 101 can be suitably reduced.

Further, the CPU 103 performs the second control at a higher rate when the number of support balls is small when the first control is performed than when the number of support balls is large. That is, in the case of a small hit of 8 or 12 where the number of support balls is small (one support ball) when the first control is performed, the number of support balls is large when the first control is performed (three support balls or three). 5) Since the second control is performed at a higher rate (100% rate) than in the case of small hits 2, 4, 6, 10 and small hits 7, 11, the game ball passing through the predetermined area in the first control At the very least, it is possible to increase the expectation that the second control will be performed.

Next, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S118 of FIG. 35 as the small hit opening pre-process.

In the small hit release preprocessing shown in FIG. 37, the CPU 103 first sets the small hit display time timer to -1 (S201), and determines whether or not the small hit display time timer has timered out (S202). If the small hit display time timer is not timered out (S202; N), the small hit release pre-processing is terminated, while if the small hit display time timer is timered out (S202; Y), the small hit type is selected. The corresponding open control process table is set (S203), the open control process timer is started (S204), and the open control of the second large winning opening 702B is started according to the contents of the set open control process data (S204). S205).

Next, a common storage mechanism control process table is set for all small hit types (S206), the storage mechanism control process timer is started (S207), and the storage mechanism is set according to the contents of the set storage mechanism control process data. After starting the control of (S208), the transmission setting of the hit start designation command according to the small hit type is performed (S209). The hit start designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S27) described above. The value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "9" (S210), which is a value corresponding to the small hit opening process (S30), and the small hit opening preprocessing is terminated.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S119 of FIG. 35 as the process during the opening of the small hit. In the small hit opening process, the CPU 103 first sets the value of the release control process timer to -1 (S211), and then sets the value of the storage mechanism control process timer to -1 (S212). Next, it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the second big winning opening 702B (S213), and if it is the opening timing of the second big winning opening 702B (S213; Y), the second big winning opening 702B is opened. It is controlled to the open state (S214), and if it is not the opening timing of the second large winning opening 702B (S213; N), the process proceeds to S215. Next, it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the second big winning opening 702B (S215), and if it is the closing timing of the second big winning opening 702B (S215; Y), the second big winning opening 702B is closed. It is controlled to the closed state (S216), and if it is not the closing timing of the second large winning opening 702B (S215; N), the process proceeds to S217.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is the storage release timing of the first storage mechanism 204 (S217), and if it is the storage release timing of the first storage mechanism 204 (S217; Y), the first storage mechanism 204 is stored. It is controlled to the release state (S218), and if it is not the storage release timing of the first storage mechanism 204 (S217; N), the process proceeds to S219. Next, it is determined whether or not it is the storage release timing of the second storage mechanism 205 (S219), and if it is the storage release timing of the second storage mechanism 205 (S219; Y), the second storage mechanism 205 is stored. It is controlled to the release state (S219), and if it is not the storage release timing of the second storage mechanism 205 (S219; N), the process proceeds to S221.

Next, it is determined whether or not it is the advance timing of the movable passage body 400 (S221), and if it is the advance timing of the movable passage body 400 (S221; Y), the movable passage body 400 is moved from the origin position to the advance position. It is moved (S222), and if it is not the advance timing of the movable passage body 400 (S221; N), the process proceeds to S223. Next, it is determined whether or not it is the evacuation timing of the movable passage body 400 (S223), and if it is the evacuation timing of the movable passage body 400 (S223; Y), the movable passage body 400 is moved from the advance position to the origin position. It is moved (S224), and if it is not the retract timing of the movable passage body 400 (S223; N), the process proceeds to S225.

Further, it is determined whether or not it is the discharge timing of the support ball (S225), and if it is the discharge timing of the support ball (S225; Y), the discharge port 287 is controlled to the open (discharge) state (S226). If it is not the discharge timing of the support ball (S225; N), the process proceeds to S227.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the third count switch 24B is turned on (S227). If the third count switch 24B is not turned on, the process proceeds to S231 (S227; N), and if the third count switch 24B is turned on (S227; Y), the third count switch 24B is already turned on. It is determined whether or not the V winning flag indicating that the game ball has passed the third count switch is set (S228). If the V winning flag is set, the process proceeds to S231 (S228; Y), if the V winning flag is not set (S228; N), the V winning flag is set (S229). Then, the transmission setting of the V winning notification command to the effect control board 12 is set (S230). The V prize notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S27) described above.

When the third count switch 24B is not turned on in S227, the V winning flag is set in S228, and the processing of S230 is completed, the discharge waiting indicating that it is the discharge waiting time of the support ball It is determined whether or not the time timer is operating (S231). If it is not the discharge waiting time, the process proceeds to (S231; N) and S232, and if it is the discharge waiting time, the process proceeds to (S231; Y) and S234.

In S232, it is determined whether or not the release control process timer is timer-out (S232), and if the release control process timer is not timer-out (S232; N), the small hit opening process is terminated. Then, when the release control process timer is out of timer (S232; Y), a value corresponding to the discharge waiting time (for example, 4000 ms) is set in the discharge waiting time timer (S233), and the small hit is being opened. End the process.

In S234, after the value of the discharge waiting time timer is set to -1 (S234), it is determined whether or not the discharge waiting time timer is out of timer (S235). If the discharge waiting time timer is not timer-out (S235; N), whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the second prize opening 702B matches the number of game balls that have been discharged (number of balls that enter and leave). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls (number of approach balls) detected by the second count switch 24A and the number of game balls (number of ejected balls) detected by the fourth count switch 24C match. (S236).

If it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the second prize opening 702B and the number of discharged game balls match (S236; Y), the player has entered the second prize opening 702B during the discharge waiting time. Assuming that all the game balls have been discharged normally, the value corresponding to the discharge end time is set in the discharge end time timer (S237), and after clearing the discharge waiting time timer (S238), the value of the special symbol process flag is set to a small value. The value is updated to "10" corresponding to the hit end process (S120) (S239), and the small hit opening process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the second prize opening 702B and the number of game balls that have been discharged do not match (S236; N), the small hit is being opened because the discharge waiting time is still in progress. To finish.

Further, when the discharge waiting time timer is timered out in S235, that is, when the number of game balls that have entered the second special winning opening 702B and the number of discharged game balls do not match during the discharge waiting time (S235; N), Set the transmission of the error specification command because the game ball that entered the 2nd prize opening 702B was not discharged normally for some reason such as staying in the route, or there is a possibility of illegal winning. (S240), the game shifts to the loop processing, and the game cannot proceed. The error designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the command control process (S27) described above.

In S232, the release control ends when the release control process timer timers out, but until the number of incoming / outgoing balls matches during the discharge waiting time set based on the release control process timer timer out. , Or the storage mechanism control is continuously executed until the discharge waiting time elapses without matching.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of a process executed in S120 of FIG. 35 as a small hit end process. In the small hit end process, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the discharge end time timer is out of timer after decrementing the value of the discharge end time timer by -1 (S250) (S251). If the discharge end time timer is not timered out (S251; N), the small hit end processing is finished, and if the discharge end time timer is timered out (S251; Y), the V winning flag is set. Whether or not, that is, whether or not a V prize has occurred during the small hit game state is determined (S252).

If the V winning flag is set in S252 (S252; Y), it is assumed that the V winning has occurred during the small hit game state, the V winning flag is cleared (S253), and the big hit flag for starting the big hit is set. (S254). Next, after determining the jackpot type according to the small hit type (S255) and setting the jackpot type buffer value (S256), the value of the special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (S114). It is updated to 4 ”(S257), and the small hit end process is terminated.

On the other hand, if the V winning flag is not set in S252 (S252; N), it is assumed that the V winning has not occurred (lost) during the small hit game state, and the value of the special symbol process flag is processed in the special symbol normal processing (S252; N). It is updated to "0" which is a value corresponding to S110) (S258), and the small hit end process is terminated.

(Operation example of the second special variable winning ball device 7B in the small hit game state)
Next, the situation of the second special variable winning ball device 7B in the small hit game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 47. 40 (A) to (E) are explanatory views showing a first opening state in a small hit gaming state of small hits 2, 4, 6, and 10. 41A to 41B are explanatory views showing a second opening state in the small hit game state of small hits 2, 4, 6, and 10. 42 (A) to (D) show a situation in which a game ball is held in a lost ball holding portion, and FIGS. 42 (E) to (H) show a situation in which a game ball is held in a lost ball holding portion. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example 2 shown. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram showing a situation in which the storage of the game ball in the first storage unit is released after the movable passage body has moved. In FIGS. 44, (A) to (D) are explanatory views showing the flow of V winning, (E) to (G) are explanatory views showing the flow of loss, and (H) is a game held by the loss ball holding portion. It is explanatory drawing which shows the situation which a ball is discharged. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing the V winning rate in FIGS. 45A to 45C. In FIG. 46, (A) is a case where a game ball is not held by the lost ball holding portion, (B) is a case where one game ball is held by the lost ball holding portion, and (C) is a game ball held by the lost ball holding portion. (D) is a chart showing the V winning rate when five game balls are held in the lost ball holding portion when three are held. 47 is a plan view of a rotating body showing a state in which the game ball passes through the discharge port, FIG. 47 is a sectional view taken along the line HH of FIG. 47, and FIG. (D) is a plan view of the rotating body showing a state in which ball biting has occurred at the discharge port, (E) is a JJ sectional view of (D), and (F) is a sphere. It is sectional drawing of the rotating body which shows the state which performs the biting elimination operation.

The operation mode of the second special variable winning ball device 7B in the small hit game state is different only in the opening control (opening number and opening timing) of the second large winning opening 702B according to the small hit type, and each of the other devices (opening timing and opening timing). For example, the operation mode of the first storage mechanism 204, the second storage mechanism 205, the rotating body 208, etc.) always operates in the same manner from the start to the end of the small hit. The small hit gaming state in the above will be described as an example, and the description of the small hit gaming state in the small hits 1, 3, 5, 7, 8 and 10 will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, only the opening pattern (opening number of times and opening timing) of the second big winning opening 702B is different depending on the small hit type, and each other device (for example, the first storage mechanism 204 or the second). The operation mode of the storage mechanism 205, the rotating body 208, etc.) is exemplified by a mode in which the small hit always operates in the same manner from the start to the end, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first is according to the small hit type. The operation modes of the 1 storage mechanism 204, the 2nd storage mechanism 205, the rotating body 208, and the like may be different.

As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, when the small hit types are small hits 2, 4, 6, and 10, the CPU 103 controls to open the second large winning opening door 702A twice based on the opening pattern B. Start. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (A), the first opening control of the second large winning opening 702B is started at the timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the small hit game state. When the second big winning opening 702B changes from the closed state to the open state, the game ball can win the second big winning opening 702B.

When the small hit game is started, the first storage plate 222 is located at the storage position, and the movable passage body 400 is located at the origin position of the passage body. The rotating body 208 is constantly rotating clockwise in a plan view at a predetermined speed from the time when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on regardless of whether or not the small hit game is started. Further, the distribution member 242 always operates based on a predetermined operation pattern (see FIGS. 50 to 54) after the small hit game state is started, regardless of the small hit type.

The game ball that has entered the second prize opening 702B flows down the first guide path 201 and is detected by the second count switch 24A. As shown in FIG. 40 (B), the first game ball P1 that has entered the second winning opening 702B is guided to the second guide path 202A, and the flow is regulated by the first storage plate 222. It is stored in the first storage unit 227. Further, the distribution member 242 changes from the first rotation state to the second rotation state at the timing when a predetermined time elapses after the second large winning opening 702B is opened.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40 (C), the second game ball P2 that has entered the second large winning opening 702B is directed to the second guide path 202A by the game ball P1 stored in the first storage unit 227. By blocking the entry, the user is guided to the third induction path 203A. Here, since the distribution member 242 is in the second rotation state, the game ball P2 guided to the third guidance path 203A comes into contact with the tip portion of the holding portion 242a of the distribution member 242, so that the holding portion 242a By inhibiting the entry into the second storage portion 247, only one is stored on the upstream side of the tip portion of the holding portion 242a in the second storage portion 247. Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (D), the third game ball P3 that has entered the second large winning opening 702B is guided from the discharge port 210a to the discharge path 210 by the game ball P2 in the second storage unit 247. Is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine.

Next, as shown in FIG. 40 (E), the CPU 103 changes the distribution member 242 to the first rotation state after the first opening, and then changes it to the second rotation state again, and then the first rotation. Return to the dynamic state. As a result, one game ball P2 stored in the second storage unit 247 falls to the inflow port 203C, is guided by the third induction path 203B, and is guided to the rotating body 208.

Next, as shown in FIG. 41 (A), the second opening control of the second large winning opening 702B is started at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the completion of the first opening. The first game ball P11 that has entered the second winning opening 702B after the second opening is started is hindered from entering the second guide path 202A by the game ball P1 stored in the first storage unit 227. By doing so, it is guided to the third lead path 203A. Here, as shown in FIG. 41 (B), since the distribution member 242 is in the first rotation state at the second opening, the game ball P11 guided to the third guidance path 203A is the distribution member. It is stored in the holding portion 242a of 242. Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (C), the second game ball P12 that has entered the second large winning opening 702B is stored on the upstream side of the game ball P11 in the second storage unit 247.

Further, as shown in FIG. 41 (D), the third game ball P3 that has entered the second large winning opening 702B is guided from the discharge port 210a to the discharge path 210 by the game ball P12 in the second storage unit 247. Is discharged to the outside of the gaming machine.

Next, as shown in FIG. 41 (E), the CPU 103 changes the distribution member 242 to the second rotation state after the second opening, so that one game ball P11 stored in the holding portion 242a Drops into the inflow port 203C and is guided by the third induction path 203B to the rotating body 208. Next, by rotating to the first rotation state, the game ball P12 stored in the second storage unit 247 flows into the holding portion 242a of the distribution member 242, and is returned to the first rotation state again. As a result, the game ball P12 that has flowed into the holding portion 242a falls into the inflow port 203C, is guided by the third guide path 203B, and is guided to the rotating body 208.

In this way, in the small hits 2, 4, 6, and 10, one game ball P1 (game ball) is stored in the first storage unit 227 and one game ball P2 rotates at the first opening. It is guided to the body 208, and the two game balls P11 and P12 are guided to the rotating body 208 at the second opening. That is, if two game balls P can be won in the second large winning opening 702B in each of the first and second openings, a total of three game balls P2, 11, 12 (support balls) can be rotated into the rotating body 208. Can be guided to (see FIG. 51).

Further, in the small hits 1, 3, 5, and 9, one game ball P1 (game ball) is stored in the first storage unit 227 at the first opening, and one game ball P2 is a rotating body 208. Is guided to. That is, if two game balls P can be won in the second large winning opening 702B by the first opening, a total of one game ball (support ball) can be guided to the rotating body 208 (see FIG. 50). ). Further, in the small hits 7 and 11, one game ball P1 (game ball) is stored in the first storage unit 227 at the first opening, and one game ball P2 is guided to the rotating body 208. At the second opening, two game balls (game balls) are guided to the rotating body 208, and at the third opening, two game balls (game balls) are guided to the rotating body 208. That is, if two game balls P can be won in the second large winning opening 702B in each of the first to third openings, a total of five game balls (support balls) can be guided to the rotating body 208 (). (See FIG. 52).

Next, an example of a situation in which the game balls P2, P11, and P12 guided to the third guidance path 203B are held by the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E will be described with reference to FIG. 42.

For example, in Example 1, as shown in FIG. 42 (A), when the game ball P2 is guided to the rotating body 208 by the third guide path 203B in the first opening, the position corresponding to the third guide path 203B. If the standing wall portion 271 is approaching, the game ball P2 is held in the third guidance path 203B. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (B), when the lost ball holding portion 273A reaches the position corresponding to the third guidance path 203B, the game ball P2 held in the third guidance path 203B is moved by the inclined bottom surface. It flows down and is held by the lost ball holding portion 273A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (C), when the game balls P11 and P12 are guided to the rotating body 208 by the third guide path 203B in the second opening, the standing wall is located at the position corresponding to the third guide path 203B. If the unit 271 is approaching, the game balls P11 and P12 are held in the third induction path 203B. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (D), when the lost ball holding portion 273D reaches the position corresponding to the third guidance path 203B, the game ball P11 held in the third guidance path 203B is moved by the inclined bottom surface. The game ball P12, which has flowed down and is held by the lost ball holding portion 273D, then flows down by the inclined bottom surface and is held by the lost ball holding portion 273E. In this case, three game balls P2, P11, and P12 are held by the lost ball holding portions 273A, 273D, and 273E on both sides of the V winning ball holding portion 272.

In Example 2, as shown in FIG. 42 (E), when the game ball P2 is guided to the rotating body 208 by the third guide path 203B in the first opening, the standing wall is at a position corresponding to the third guide path 203B. When the portion 271 is approaching, the game ball P2 is held in the third guide path 203B. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (F), when the lost ball holding portion 273D reaches the position corresponding to the third guidance path 203B, the game ball P2 held in the third guidance path 203B is moved by the inclined bottom surface. It flows down and is held by the lost ball holding portion 273D.

Next, as shown in FIG. 42 (G), when the game balls P11 and P12 are guided to the rotating body 208 by the third guide path 203B in the second opening, the standing wall is located at the position corresponding to the third guide path 203B. If the unit 271 is approaching, the game balls P11 and P12 are held in the third induction path 203B. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (D), when the lost ball holding portion 273A reaches the position corresponding to the third guidance path 203B, the game ball P11 held in the third guidance path 203B is moved by the inclined bottom surface. It flows down and is held by the lost ball holding portion 273A. Further, after a while, the game ball P12 guided to the third guide path 203B flows down by the inclined bottom surface and is held by the lost ball holding portion 273C. In this case, three game balls P2, P11, and P12 are held by the lost ball holding portion 273A on one side of the V winning ball holding portion 272 and the lost ball holding portions 273C and 273D which are separated from each other.

In this way, the timing at which the game ball P2 reaches the rotating body 208 at the first opening and then the game ball P11 reaches the rotating body 208 at the second opening, and the game ball P11 at the second opening are the rotating bodies. The period (time lag) from the arrival at 208 to the arrival of the game ball P12 at the rotating body 208 is always substantially the same, but any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E is located at the position corresponding to the third induction path 203B. Since it is uncertain whether or not it will reach, the game balls P2, P11, and P12 are not always held in the same lost ball holding portion among the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E shown in Examples 1 and 2 of FIG. 40. ..

Next, as shown in FIG. 43A, the CPU 103 passes through the passage at the timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the small hit game state (the timing after the opening control of the second special winning opening 702B is completed). The body motor 91 moves the movable passage body 400 located at the origin position of the passage body on the right side of the image display device 5 to the passage body advance position. As a result, the second guide path 202A and the second guide path 202B communicate with each other to form one second guide path 202A, 202B, and when the movable passage body 400 moves to the passage body advance position, the decorative member 404L , 404R moves from the undeployed position to the deployed position. In this way, the movement of the second guide path 202B constitutes one second guide path, and the decorative members 404L and 404R move from the non-deployed position to the deployed position to change the form of the movable passage body 400. By doing so, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness. Further, in FIG. 43A, the image or the like displayed on the image display device 5 is omitted.

Then, the CPU 103 moves the movable passage body 400 to the passage body advance position, and then moves the first storage plate 222 from the storage position to the release position by the fourth solenoid 84. As a result, one game ball P1 (game ball) stored in the first storage unit 227 flows down the second guide paths 202A and 202B, and the game ball P1 that flows down the second guide paths 202A and 202B rotates. It falls slightly behind the rotation shaft 90A on the upper surface of the disk portion 270 of the body 208. The player can visually recognize the game ball passing through the second guide path 202B from between the left and right decorative members 404L and 404R that have moved to the deployed position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 43B, since the rotating shaft 90A of the rotating body 208 is tilted toward the front side, the rotating body 208 falls slightly behind the rotating shaft 90A on the upper surface of the disk portion 270 of the rotating body 208. The game ball P1 flows down with the upper surface of the disk portion 270 facing forward. Here, even if the game ball P1 reaches the standing wall portion 271 without entering the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E at the timing when the game ball P1 flows down toward the front side, the upper surface of the disc portion 270 to the upper portion of the standing wall portion 271. Since the protruding length L30 to the contact position with the game ball is longer than the radius R of the game ball, the game ball P1 gets over the standing wall portion 271 and falls out of the rotating body 208 with the force of flowing down. It is prevented from doing so.

Next, an example of a situation in which the game ball P1 discharged to the upper surface of the disk portion 270 of the rotating body 208 is held by the V winning ball holding portion 272 or the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E will be described with reference to FIG. ..

First, to explain the flow of V winning, first, as shown in FIG. 44 (A), the game ball P1 that has fallen from the rotation axis 90A on the upper surface of the disk portion 270 to the upper side of the inclination is directed toward the lower side of the inclination. Flow down. Then, when the game ball P1 reaches the lowest portion of the peripheral edge inclination of the disk portion 270, for example, when the lost ball holding portion 273D moves as shown in FIG. 44 (B), the game is played by the lost ball holding portion 273D. By holding the ball P11, the game ball P1 is hindered from entering the lost ball holding portion 273D by the game ball P11, and is guided to the side of the game ball P11.

Next, as shown in FIG. 44 (C), the game ball P1 guided to the side of the game ball P11 stays at the lowermost peripheral slope portion of the disk portion 270 by the inner surface of the rotating vertical wall portion 271. Next, the game ball P12 hinders the entry into the lost ball holding portion 273E that has moved to the lowest inclined portion. Then, when the V winning ball holding portion 272 reaches the lowest portion of the peripheral inclination, the V winning ball holding portion 272 enters the V winning ball holding portion 272. At this time, the game ball P1 is placed on the bottom wall portion of the support cylinder 265 and is held by the V winning ball holding portion 272. Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (D), when the V winning ball holding portion 272 rotates and reaches the position corresponding to the V winning opening 283, the game ball P1 enters the V winning opening 283 and the third count switch. A V prize is generated by being detected by 24B.

Next, the flow of loss will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 44 (E), the game ball P1 that has fallen from the rotation axis 90A on the upper surface of the disk portion 270 to the upper side of the inclination flows down toward the lower side of the inclination. do. Then, when the game ball P1 reaches the lowest peripheral inclination portion of the disk portion 270, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (F), the lost ball holding portion 273B in which the game balls P2, P11, and P12 are not held. Is moved, the game ball P1 is allowed to enter the lost ball holding portion 273B and is held. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 44 (G), the game balls P1, P2, P11, and P12 are all held by the lost ball holding portions 273A, 273B, 273D, and 273E, so that the V prize does not occur.

As shown in FIG. 44 (H), the opening / closing plate 289 of the game balls P1, P2, P11, and P12 held by the lost ball holding portions 273A, 273B, 273D, and 273E is driven during the discharge standby period described later. Then, by opening the discharge port 287, the player is guided to the lost ball guidance path 288.

In this way, when the game ball P1 that has fallen on the upper surface of the disk portion 270 reaches the lowest portion of the peripheral edge inclination of the disk portion 270, if any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E moves, the lost ball is held. If the game ball P is not held in the portions 273A to 273E, the game ball P1 enters and is held in the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E, and is finally discharged without winning a V, while the lost ball. If the game ball P is held by the holding portions 273A to 273E, the approach is hindered by the game ball P. Further, when the standing wall portion 271 moves, the game ball P1 stays at the lowermost portion of the peripheral edge inclination due to the standing wall portion 271.

That is, when the V winning ball holding portion 272 moves while the game ball P1 (game ball) is staying at the lowest portion of the peripheral inclination, the V winning ball holding portion 272 moves while being held by the V winning ball holding portion 272. V winning is generated by entering the winning opening 283. Further, when any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E moves while the gaming ball P1 (game ball) is staying at the lowest portion of the peripheral inclination, the gaming ball P is moved to the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E. If it is held, it will continue to stay without entering, and if it is not held, it will move to the discharge port 287 while being held and will be discharged to the outside of the gaming machine without winning a V prize.

In this way, the probability that the game ball P1 that has fallen on the upper surface of the disk portion 270 is held by the V winning ball holding portion 272 and the V winning occurs (V winning rate) is shown in FIGS. 45 (A), (B), and (C). Will be shown in. Specifically, the period during which the game ball P1 can enter the V winning ball holding portion 272 is not only the period during which the V winning ball holding portion 272 passes through the lowermost peripheral inclination portion (passing point S), but actually, The region including the vertical wall portion 271 on the rotation direction side (lost ball holding portion 273E side) of the V winning ball holding portion 272 (diagonal region in FIGS. 45A, BB, and C) passes through the passing point S. It will be a period to do.

For example, as shown in FIG. 45 (A), when the game ball is not held by any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E, the V winning rate is about 16.7%. Further, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), when one game ball P is held by the lost ball holding portion 273E adjacent to the rotation direction side of the V winning ball holding portion 272, the V winning rate is about 33. It will be 0.3%. Further, as shown in FIG. 45 (C), the game ball P is held by the adjacent lost ball holding portion 273E on the rotation direction side of the V winning ball holding portion 272 and the adjacent lost ball holding portion 273D, respectively. If so, the V winning rate will be about 50%.

In this way, when the game balls P are continuously held by the lost ball holding portions 273E and 273D on the rotation direction side of the V winning ball holding portion 272, the game balls P held by these lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E. And the plurality of standing wall portions 271 form a continuous standing wall portion for retaining the game ball P1 in the disk portion 270, whereby the period in which the shaded area passes through the passing point S becomes longer, so that the V winning rate Also rises. The table shown in FIG. 46 (A) shows the V winning rate in the combination in which the lost ball holding portions 273B to 273E hold 0 game balls, and the table shown in FIG. 46 (B) shows the V winning rate. The V winning rate in the combination in which one game ball is held in the lost ball holding portions 273B to 273E is shown, and in the table shown in FIG. 46 (C), three games are shown in the lost ball holding portions 273B to 273E. The V winning rate in the combination in which the balls are held is shown, and the table shown in FIG. 46 (D) shows the V winning rate in the combination in which the lost ball holding portions 273B to 273E hold five game balls. Has been done.

As shown in the tables of FIGS. 46 (A) to 46 (D), when the game ball P is continuously held by the lost ball holding portions 273A and 273B on the side opposite to the rotation direction of the V winning ball holding portion 272. If the game ball P is not held by the lost ball holding unit 273E next to the V winning ball holding unit 272, the game ball P1 is held by the losing ball holding units 273A to 273E. Since the entry to the V winning ball holding portion 272 is not performed after the entry to the 273B to 273E is blocked and stays, the V winning rate does not increase.

Further, even when one game ball is held by any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E, the V winning rate when held by the lost ball holding portion 273E is about 33.3% in the middle. Even when three game balls are held in any three of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E, the V winning rate is the lowest of about 16.7% depending on the combination. Further, even when two game balls are continuously held by the adjacent lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E among the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E, the V winning ball holding portion 272 straddles the lost ball holding portion 273E. The V winning rate is the lowest, about 16.7%, when the ball is continuously held by the lost ball holding portions 273A and 273B, which are on the opposite side of the rotation direction of the V winning ball holding portion 272. Become.

That is, before the storage of the game ball P1 (game ball) stored in the first storage unit 227 is released, the game ball P (support ball) guided to the rotating body 208 after being stored in the second storage unit 247. ) Increases, the number of lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E that hinder the entry of the game ball increases, and the V winning rate increases. Therefore, a maximum of five support balls can be guided to the rotating body 208. Hits 7, 11, small hits 2, 4, 6, 10 with a maximum of 3 support balls guided by the rotating body 208, small hits 1, 3 with a maximum of 1 support ball guided by the rotating body 208 The probability of winning a big hit by winning V in the order of 5 and 9 (player's advantage) is high, but the number of support balls is small depending on which of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E holds the support ball. Even in this case, the V winning rate may be higher than when the number of support balls is large, so that the interest is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game balls P held by the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E move on the upper surface of the bottom wall of the support cylinder 265 as the rotating body 208 rotates (FIG. 14 (B)). reference). Further, as shown in FIG. 47 (A), the game ball P held by any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E passes through the discharge port 287 in a state where the discharge port 287 is closed by the opening / closing plate 289. In this case, since the opening / closing plate 289 is arranged so as to close the discharge port 287 from the lower surface side, when passing through the discharge port 287, it temporarily falls from the upper surface of the bottom wall of the support cylinder 265 and passes over the opening / closing plate 289. After that, it will ride on the upper surface of the bottom wall of the support cylinder 265.

Here, as shown in FIG. 47 (B), inclined portions 287A and 287B inclined downward toward the discharge port 287 are formed on the front and rear sides of the discharge port 287 on the bottom wall of the support cylinder 265. The step between the discharge port 287 and the upper surface of the bottom wall of the support cylinder 265 is reduced so that the game ball P can be moved smoothly. Further, as shown in FIG. 47 (C), when the opening / closing plate 289 opens the discharge port 287, the game ball P that has moved to the discharge port 287 can be smoothly moved in the falling direction by the inclined portion 287A.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 47 (D) and 47 (E), with the opening / closing plate 289 opening the discharge port 287, the game ball P held by any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E is released from the discharge port 287. When falling, the game ball P may be sandwiched between the opening peripheral edge of the discharge port 287 and the standing wall portion 271, and ball biting may occur.

Therefore, as will be described later, the CPU 103 moves the opening / closing plate 289 to the open position to open the discharge port 287 after the small hit game state is completed, and holds the game balls P held by the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E. After the discharge waiting period for dropping from the discharge port 287 is completed, the ball biting elimination operation control is executed in which the opening / closing operation of moving the opening / closing plate 289 from the open position to the closed position by the sixth solenoid 86 is repeated twice during the discharge end period. After that, keep it in the open position. By performing this ball biting elimination operation control, the opening / closing plate 289 collides with the game ball P sandwiched between the opening peripheral edge of the discharge port 287 and the standing wall portion 271, and the game ball P falls or holds the lost ball due to this impact. Since it is returned to the portions 273A to 273E, the ball biting state can be eliminated.

(Second lead path 202A, 202B)
Next, the second induction paths 202A and 202B will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 and 49. FIG. 48 is a schematic explanatory view showing the structure of the second guide path and the rotating body. In FIG. 49, (A) is a state in which a non-spherical object is stored in the first storage portion, and (B) is a state in which the storage in the first storage portion is released but the non-spherical object does not flow down, (C). ) Is an explanatory diagram showing a state in which the storage of the first storage portion is released and a non-spherical object flows down.

As shown in FIG. 48, the game ball P1 (game ball) stored in the first storage unit 227 has a second guide path 202A extending diagonally downward to the right from the first storage unit 227 and a passage body. The second guide path 202B formed linearly from the upper end to the lower end of the movable passage body 400 that has moved to the advance position is guided to the upper surface of the disk portion 270 of the rotating body 208.

In this embodiment, A. The first time from when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed (the symbol is confirmed) to when the stored state of the game ball P1 stored in the first storage unit 227 is released is fixed, and B.I. The second time from when the stored state of the game ball P1 stored in the first storage unit 227 is released until the game ball P1 flows down the second induction paths 202A and 202B and reaches the rotating body 208 is almost constant. It is said that.

As described above, since the first time of A and the second time of B are designed to be substantially constant regardless of the small hit type, C.I. Depending on the position of the V winning ball holding unit 272 at the timing when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the game ball P1 (game ball) stored in the first storage unit 227 tilts the periphery of the rotating body 208. When the lowest portion is reached, it is possible to predict whether the V winning ball holding portion 272 or the lost ball holding portion 273A to 273E can be entered.

Therefore, it is possible to arbitrarily adjust the second time of B to increase the V winning probability, but it is difficult to increase the flow speed of the game ball P1 and hit the pachinko game machine 1. When the flow speed of the game ball P1 is adjusted by such means, a vibration detection sensor (not shown) or the like provided in the pachinko game machine 1 operates.

Therefore, a plurality of types of non-spherical objects X (see FIG. 49), which are different from the regular game ball P (also referred to as a proper game ball) and have different flow speeds flowing down the second guide paths 202A and 202B, are prepared. The flow speed at which the V prize can be won is predicted according to the position of the V prize ball holding unit 272 at the timing when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, and the object X of the type corresponding to the predicted flow speed is launched, and the second large There is a problem that the V winning probability can be illegally increased by winning a prize in the winning opening 702B and storing it in the first storage unit 227.

In the present embodiment, the second guide path 202A, which guides the game ball P that has entered the second large winning opening 702B so as to be able to enter the V winning opening 283, is non-spherical while allowing the proper movement of the game ball P. An obstruction portion for inhibiting the movement of the object X is provided.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (A), the second bottom surface 212B of the first storage portion 227 in the forming member forming the second lead path 202A is the first storage portion on the bottom surface of the second lead path 202A. Since the downward inclination angle is smaller than that of the third bottom surface 212C and the fourth bottom surface 212D constituting the region other than 227 (see FIG. 7A. θ2 <θ1, θ3, θ4), the movement of the non-spherical object X can be performed. It constitutes an inhibitory part for inhibiting.

For example, the game ball P1 becomes the first after releasing the storage state of the game ball P1 stored in the first storage unit 227 according to the position of the V winning ball holding unit 272 at the timing when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In order to adjust so that the second time for flowing down the two-guide paths 202A and 202B to reach the rotating body 208 becomes longer, for example, when the small hit game state is started, the flow speed is higher than the appropriate game ball. A case where a slow object X is replaced with a proper game ball, fired by a launching device, and stored in the first storage unit 227 is performed.

In the present embodiment, an icosahedron is applied as an example of the non-spherical object X, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if it is non-spherical, it is a polyhedron other than the icosahedron. Is conceivable to be used. It is also conceivable to reduce the flow rate by adhering the drug to the surface of the spherical body. As a drug having a low speed slower than the appropriate speed, it can inhibit the movement (rolling) and slippage of the game ball due to rotation, and can be easily attached to the game ball, and is attached. A liquid with transparency that is not easily recognized as being present, that is, a liquid having transparency in which the friction and bonding force with the passage of the improper sphere is greater than the friction and bonding force (medium) with the passage of the proper sphere. It is conceivable that a chemical or the like, for example, an acrylic-based or urethane-based liquid pressure-sensitive adhesive, which is a pressure-sensitive adhesive, is used.

As shown in FIG. 49 (B1), the object X launched in place of the proper game ball has a non-spherical shape, so that the flow speed is slower than that of the proper game ball. Further, the downward inclination angle of the second bottom surface 212B of the first storage unit 227 is smaller than that of the third bottom surface 212C and the fourth bottom surface 212D other than the first storage unit 227. Therefore, the object X stored on the second bottom surface 212B of the first storage unit 227 retains the second bottom surface 212B even if the first storage plate 222 moves from the storage position to the release position and the storage state is released. Since there is a high possibility that the object X will stay without flowing down, it is possible to preferably suppress the flow down of the object X at the timing when the V prize can be won.

Further, as shown in FIG. 49 (B2), when the first storage plate 222 moves from the storage position to the release position and the storage state is released, when the object X flows down the second bottom surface 212B, the second induction In the region downstream of the second bottom surface 212B on the bottom surface of the forming member forming the path 202A, the third bottom surface 212C having a larger downward inclination angle than the other fourth bottom surface 212D is formed, so that the third bottom surface 212C is formed. The flow speed increases when the 212C flows down. As a result, the time for the object X to flow down the second guide paths 202A and 202B can be made closer to the time for the proper game ball to flow down the second guide paths 202A and 202B, so that the passing speed of the game ball can be made uniform. By doing so, fraudulent activity can be suppressed.

(Flow of small hit game state)
Next, the flow of the small hit game state in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54. FIG. 50 is a timing chart showing the flow of the period during which the second major winning opening is opened in the small hits 1, 3, 5, 9 and the small hits 8, 12. FIG. 51 is a timing chart showing the flow of the period during which the second large winning opening is opened in the small hits 2, 4, 6, and 10. FIG. 52 is a timing chart showing the flow of the period during which the second big winning opening is opened in the small hits 7 and 11. FIG. 53 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a V prize is generated after the first storage mechanism is released in the small hits 1 to 7, 9 to 11. FIG. 54 is a timing chart showing a flow in which V winning does not occur after the first storage mechanism is released in the small hits 1 to 7, 9 to 11. FIG. 55 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a V prize is generated after the first opening in the small hits 8 and 12. FIG. 56 is a timing chart showing a flow in which V winning does not occur after the first opening in the small hits 8 and 12. FIG. 57 is a timing chart showing a flow in which a V prize is generated after the second opening in the small hits 8 and 12. FIG. 58 is a timing chart showing a flow in which an error occurs due to a mismatch between the incoming and outgoing balls in the small hits 7 and 11.

First, when the first special figure game or the second special figure game (variable display of the special symbol) is started based on the first start prize or the second start prize, the effect control CPU 120 starts the first special figure game or In synchronization with the second special figure game, variable display of the decorative symbol is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. In addition, when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the special figure game, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination indicating "small hit".

As a combination of small hit symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), symbols consisting of the same numbers (for example, "1") are stopped and displayed in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The small hit symbol M (also referred to as a special symbol), which is displayed only in the case of a small hit, is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the center. The combination of small hit symbols may be, for example, a combination in which a special symbol dedicated to small hits is stopped and displayed in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, or a combination of symbols consisting of numbers. good. In the case of a combination of numbers, a combination of uniform symbols may be used, or a combination of odd or even symbols, which are different from each other, may be used.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the small hit symbol M, there are a plurality of small hit symbols M having different background colors. The effect control CPU 120 is for determining the small hit symbol type shown in FIG. 65 (B) according to the small hit type specified from the variable display result specification command transmitted from the CPU 103 when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started. Using the table, it is determined which of the small hit symbols M whose background color is "blue", "green", "red", and "rainbow" is to be displayed.

Specifically, when the small hit type is small hit 1, 3, 5, or 9, the small hit symbol M with the background color "blue" is determined at a rate of 70%, and the small hit with the background color "green" is determined. The symbol M is determined at a rate of 30%. When the small hit type is small hits 8 and 12, the small hit symbol M with the background color "blue" is determined at a rate of 50%, and the small hit symbol M with the background color "green" is determined at a rate of 45%. Then, the small hit symbol M whose background color is "red" is determined at a rate of 5%. When the small hit types are small hits 2, 4, 6, and 10, the small hit symbol M with the background color "blue" is determined at a rate of 40%, and the small hit symbol M with the background color "green" is 50%. The small hit symbol M whose background color is "red" is determined at a ratio of 10%. When the small hit type is small hits 7 and 11, the small hit symbol M with the background color "red" is determined at a rate of 20%, and the small hit symbol M with the background color "rainbow" is determined at a rate of 80%. do.

When the small hit type with a large maximum number of support balls that can be guided to the rotating body 208 is determined, the small hit symbol M having a background color of "red" or "rainbow" is easily displayed and can be guided to the rotating body 208. When the small hit type with a small maximum number of support balls is determined, the small hit symbol M having a background color of "blue" or "green" is likely to be displayed. That is, the expectation of V prize is high in the order of the background colors of "rainbow", "red", "green", and "blue". Therefore, it is possible to suggest that the small hit type having a large number of support balls may be determined by the background color of the small hit symbol M that is stopped and displayed before being controlled to the small hit game state. It is possible to raise the expectation of the person.

As described above, the effect control CPU 120 has a small hit symbol M having a different background color depending on which of the small hit types 1 to 10 the small hit display result corresponds to as the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. By stopping and displaying, it is possible to execute the V winning suggestion effect indication that suggests that the game ball P enters the V winning opening 283, so that the player pays attention to the aspect of the small hit symbol M. You can improve your interest.

In the present embodiment, a mode in which it is possible to suggest a small hit type determined by the background color of the small hit symbol M is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the small hit symbol M is used. It may be possible to suggest a small hit type determined by a pattern mode different from the background color, such as displayed characters, character size, and pattern size.

Next, based on FIGS. 50 to 52, the flow {1/2} of the first half of each of the various small hits 1 to 7 and 9 to 11 and the small hit game states of each of the various small hits 8 and 12. The flow {1/3} of the first half of the above will be described. First, the CPU 103 stops and displays the small hit symbol in the special figure game to set it as "small hit", and then starts controlling the small hit game state. The opening control of the two major winning openings 702B is started, and the storage mechanism control is started based on the storage mechanism control process data common to all small hit types. Specifically, the fifth solenoid 85 starts the control to operate the distribution member 242 based on the predetermined operation pattern, and the timing Ta1 in which a predetermined time elapses from the timing Ta0 when the control of the small hit game state is started. At Tb1 and Tc1, the opening / closing plate 289 is moved from the open position to the closed position by the sixth solenoid 86 to close the discharge port 287, so that the support balls can be held by the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the case of small hits 1, 3, 5, 9 and small hits 8, 12, the CPU 103 waits for the first opening (for example, about 60) from the timing Ta0 when the control of the small hit game state is started. At the timing Ta2 when (seconds) have elapsed, the second special winning opening door 702A is driven by the third solenoid 83 to start the first opening control based on the opening pattern A. As a result, the game ball can be won in the second large winning opening 702B.

When the first game ball P wins the second large winning opening 702B after starting the first opening control, the game ball P passes through the first induction path 201 and is detected by the second count switch 24A. After that, it is guided to the second induction path 202A, and is stored in the first storage unit 227 by restricting the flow down by the first storage plate 222. Next, the second game ball P that has entered the second winning opening 702B is blocked from entering the second guide path 202A by the first game ball P stored in the first storage unit 227. It is guided to the third induction path 203A and reaches the second storage portion 247. At this time, since the distribution member 242 has changed to the second rotation state, only one game ball P2 is stored in the second storage portion 247 on the upstream side of the tip of the distribution member 242. Further, the third and subsequent game balls P that have entered the second special winning opening 702B are guided to the second storage portion 247 and then discharged from the discharge port 210a to the discharge path 210.

Then, at the timing Ta3 when the first opening control is completed, the distribution member 242 changes from the second rotation state to the first rotation state, and then changes to the second rotation state again, the second storage unit 247 The game ball P (support ball) stored in the above is guided by the third guide path 203B and guided to the rotating body 208, and is held by any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E.

In this way, in the small hits 1, 3, 5, and 9, one game ball is stored in the first storage unit 227 by performing the opening control of the second large winning opening 702B once based on the opening pattern A. Therefore, it is possible for the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E of the rotating body 208 to hold at most one support ball, but it is possible for the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E to hold two or more support balls. It is said to be a difficult small hit.

Further, in the small hits 8 and 12, one game ball is stored in the first storage unit 227 by performing the opening control of the second large winning opening 702B once based on the opening pattern D and entering the game ball. Therefore, it is possible for the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E of the rotating body 208 to hold at most one support ball, but it is possible for the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E to hold two or more support balls. Have difficulty.

Next, as shown in FIG. 51, in the case of small hits 2, 4, 6, and 10, the CPU 103 has a second open waiting time (for example, about 50 seconds) from the timing Tb0 when the control of the small hit game state is started. At the elapsed timing Tb2, the second special winning opening door 702A is driven by the third solenoid 83 to start the first opening control based on the opening pattern B. As a result, the game ball can be won in the second large winning opening 702B.

When the first game ball P wins the second large winning opening 702B after starting the first opening control, the game ball P passes through the first induction path 201 and is detected by the second count switch 24A. After that, it is guided to the second induction path 202A, and is stored in the first storage unit 227 by restricting the flow down by the first storage plate 222. Next, the second game ball P that has entered the second winning opening 702B is blocked from entering the second guide path 202A by the first game ball P stored in the first storage unit 227. It is guided to the third induction path 203A and reaches the second storage portion 247. At this time, since the distribution member 242 has changed to the second rotation state, only one game ball P is stored in the second storage portion 247 on the upstream side of the tip of the distribution member 242. Further, the third and subsequent game balls P that have entered the second special winning opening 702B are guided to the second storage portion 247 and then discharged from the discharge port 210a to the discharge path 210.

Then, after the first opening control is completed and the distribution member 242 changes from the second rotation state to the first rotation state, the second storage unit 247 changes to the second rotation state again at the timing Tb3. The game ball P (support ball) stored in the game ball P (support ball) is guided by the third guide path 203B and guided to the rotating body 208, and the first support ball is held in any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E. ..

Next, the CPU 103 starts the second opening control at the timing Tb4 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first opening control was completed. All the game balls P that won the second big winning opening 702B in the second opening control are blocked from entering the second guide path 202A by the first game ball P stored in the first storage unit 227. It is guided to the third induction path 203A and reaches the second storage portion 247. In the second opening control, since the distribution member 242 is changed to the first rotation state, the two game balls P are stored in the second storage unit 247, and the third and subsequent game balls P are discharged. It is discharged from the outlet 210a to the discharge path 210.

Then, at the timing Tb5 when the second opening control is completed and the distribution member 242 changes from the first rotation state to the second rotation state, the first game ball stored in the second storage unit 247. P (support ball) is guided by the third guide path 203B and guided to the rotating body 208, and the second support ball is held by any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E. Next, after the distribution member 242 changed from the second rotation state to the first rotation state, the second one stored in the second storage unit 247 at the timing Tb6 when the distribution member 242 changed to the second rotation state again. The game ball P (support ball) is guided by the third guide path 203B and guided to the rotating body 208, and the third support ball is held by any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E.

In this way, in the small hits 2, 4, 6, and 10, the opening control of the second large winning opening 702B is performed twice based on the opening pattern B, so that one game ball is generated in the first storage unit 227. It is possible to have the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E of the rotating body 208 hold up to three support balls, but to have the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E hold four or more support balls. Is considered a difficult small hit.

Next, as shown in FIG. 52, in the case of the small hits 7 and 11, the CPU 103 has the timing Tc2 in which the third opening waiting time (for example, about 35 seconds) has elapsed from the timing Tc0 when the control of the small hit game state is started. Then, the second large winning opening door 702A is driven by the third solenoid 83 to start the first opening control based on the opening pattern C. As a result, the game ball can be won in the second large winning opening 702B.

When the first game ball P wins the second large winning opening 702B after starting the first opening control, the game ball P passes through the first induction path 201 and is detected by the second count switch 24A. After that, it is guided to the second induction path 202A, and is stored in the first storage unit 227 by restricting the flow down by the first storage plate 222. Next, the second game ball P that has entered the second winning opening 702B is blocked from entering the second guide path 202A by the first game ball P stored in the first storage unit 227. It is guided to the third induction path 203A and reaches the second storage portion 247. At this time, since the distribution member 242 has changed to the second rotation state, only one game ball P is stored in the second storage portion 247 on the upstream side of the tip of the distribution member 242. Further, the third and subsequent game balls P that have entered the second special winning opening 702B are guided to the second storage portion 247 and then discharged from the discharge port 210a to the discharge path 210.

Then, after the first opening control is completed and the distribution member 242 changes from the second rotation state to the first rotation state, the second storage unit 247 changes to the second rotation state again at the timing Tc3. The game ball P (support ball) stored in the game ball P (support ball) is guided by the third guide path 203B and guided to the rotating body 208, and the first support ball is held in any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E. ..

Next, the CPU 103 starts the second opening control at the timing Tc4 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first opening control was completed. All the game balls P that won the second big winning opening 702B in the second opening control are blocked from entering the second guide path 202A by the first game ball P stored in the first storage unit 227. It is guided to the third induction path 203A and reaches the second storage portion 247. In the second opening control, since the distribution member 242 is changed to the first rotation state, the two game balls P are stored in the second storage unit 247, and the third and subsequent game balls P are discharged. It is discharged from the outlet 210a to the discharge path 210.

Then, at the timing Tc5 when the second opening control is completed and the distribution member 242 changes from the first rotation state to the second rotation state, the first game ball stored in the second storage unit 247. P (support ball) is guided by the third guide path 203B and guided to the rotating body 208, and the second support ball is held by any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E. Next, after the distribution member 242 changed from the second rotation state to the first rotation state, the second one stored in the second storage unit 247 at the timing Tc6 when the distribution member 242 changed to the second rotation state again. The game ball P (support ball) is guided by the third guide path 203B and guided to the rotating body 208, and the third support ball is held by any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E.

Next, the CPU 103 starts the third opening control at the timing Tc7 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the second opening control was completed. All the game balls P that won the second big winning opening 702B in the third opening control are blocked from entering the second guide path 202A by the first game ball P stored in the first storage unit 227. It is guided to the third induction path 203A and reaches the second storage portion 247. In the third opening control, since the distribution member 242 is changed to the first rotation state, the two game balls P are stored in the second storage unit 247, and the third and subsequent game balls P are discharged. It is discharged from the outlet 210a to the discharge path 210.

Then, at the timing Tc8 when the third opening control is completed and the distribution member 242 changes from the first rotation state to the second rotation state, the first game ball stored in the second storage unit 247. P (support ball) is guided by the third lead path 203B and guided to the rotating body 208, and the fourth support ball is held by any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E. Next, after the distribution member 242 changed from the second rotation state to the first rotation state, the second one stored in the second storage unit 247 at the timing Tc9 when the distribution member 242 changed to the second rotation state again. The game ball P (support ball) is guided by the third guide path 203B and guided to the rotating body 208, and the fifth support ball is held by any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E.

In this way, in the small hits 7 and 11, one game ball is stored in the first storage unit 227 and rotates by performing the opening control of the second large winning opening 702B three times based on the opening pattern C. If all the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E of the body 208 can hold a maximum of 5 support balls, that is, if 6 game balls can be won in the 2nd big winning opening 702B. , V It is a small hit that can make the winning rate 100%.

As described above, when the CPU 103 starts the control of the small hit game state, the distribution member 242 always operates in common based on a predetermined operation pattern regardless of the small hit type 1 to 12. On the other hand, since the opening patterns A to D of the second large winning opening 702B differ depending on the small hit type, the opening timing and the number of times of opening with respect to the operation pattern of the distribution member 242 change, so that the game ball P changes depending on the small hit type. The operation mode (whether the first rotation state or the second rotation state) of the distribution member 242 when the second storage mechanism 205 is reached is different. By doing so, in the case of a small hit, how many game balls P that have entered the second large winning opening 702B are stored by the second storage mechanism 205, that is, how many support balls are rotating bodies. Since it becomes difficult to understand whether or not the player is guided to 208, the monotonousness of the game can be avoided and the interest can be improved.

That is, since the opening patterns A to D of the second large winning opening 702B are different depending on the small hit type, the number of game balls P stored by the second storage mechanism 205 is different, and the third induction paths 203A and 203B are different. The number of game balls P stored by the second storage mechanism 205 after being guided to, that is, the number of support balls held by the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E is different, and the V winning rate (big hit probability) is corresponding to this. Because the game changes, it is possible to avoid the monotony of the game and improve the interest.

More specifically, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is a game in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters the second winning opening 702B and is stored in the first storage mechanism 204 according to the number of support balls stored by the second storage mechanism 205. Not only does the rate at which the ball passes through the V winning opening 283 change, but the opening patterns A to D of the second large winning opening 702B differ depending on the small hit type, so that the support stored by the second storage mechanism 205 is stored. Since the number of balls changes, not only the V winning rate changes depending on the number of support balls stored by the second storage mechanism 205, but also the V winning rate depends on the small hit type and the winning probability of each small hit type. Will change, so the monotony of the game can be avoided and the interest can be improved.

Next, the flow {2/2} of the latter half of the small hit game state common to the small hits 1 to 7 and 9 to 11 will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54.

As shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the CPU 103 uses the passage body motor 91 to move the movable passage at the timing T20 when a predetermined time (for example, about 80 seconds) has elapsed from the timing Ta0 when the control of the small hit game state is started. The body 400 is moved from the aisle body origin position to the aisle body advance position. Then, at the timing T22 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing T21 when the movement of the movable passage body 400 from the passage body origin position to the passage body advance position is completed, the first storage plate 222 is released from the storage position by the fourth solenoid 84. Move to.

Then, as shown in FIG. 53, when the game ball stored in the first storage unit 227 reaches the rotating body 208 and then enters and is held in the V winning ball holding unit 272, the rotating body 208 rotates. When the V winning ball holding unit 272 rotates above the V winning opening 283, it falls into the V winning opening 283 and is detected by the third count switch 24B, the CPU 103 determines that a V winning jackpot has occurred. ..

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 54, the CPU 103 moves the first storage plate 222 from the storage position to the release position by the fourth solenoid 84 at the timing T22, so that the game ball stored in the first storage unit 227 rotates. After reaching the body 208, if it is held by any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E, the V winning jackpot does not occur.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 53 and 54, the CPU 103 takes a predetermined time from the timing T22 when the storage of the first storage unit 227 is released (for example, the game ball from which the storage of the first storage unit 227 is released is the second induction). At the timing T23 when the time required for flowing down the routes 202A and 202B, entering the V winning opening 283, and reaching the third count switch 24B) has elapsed, the movable passage body 400 is passed through the passage body by the passage body motor 91. Evacuate from the advance position to the origin position of the passage body. Then, at the timing T25 when a predetermined time elapses from the timing T24 when the movable passage body 400 reaches the origin position of the passage body, the operation of changing the distribution member 242 from the first rotation state to the second rotation state is repeated three times. As a result, the game ball P remaining in the second storage mechanism 205 can be guided to the rotating body 208 due to some trouble.

Further, the opening / closing plate 289 is moved from the closed position to the open position by the sixth solenoid 86 to open the discharge port 287. As a result, the support balls held by the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E are discharged from the discharge port 287.

Further, after starting the control of the small hit game state, the CPU 103 executes a process of adding and updating the count value of the approach ball number counter (not shown) every time the game ball is detected by the second count switch 24A. At the same time, every time the third count switch 24B for detecting the V winning ball and the fourth count switch 24C for detecting the lost ball detect a game ball, the count value of the approach ball counter (not shown) is subtracted and updated. Running.

Then, the count value of the approach ball count counter (not shown) became "0" between the timing T25 when the discharge port 287 was opened and the elapse of the discharge ball waiting time (for example, 40 seconds), that is, At the timing T26 when the number of approaching balls entering the second special variable winning ball device 7B and the number of ejected balls (number of entering and exiting balls) match, all the game balls P entering the second major winning opening 702B are ejected. Judged as The discharge ball waiting time is indefinite, and the count value of the approach ball number counter (not shown) becomes "0", or the count value of the approach ball number counter (not shown) becomes "0". It ends when the seconds have passed.

Next, the opening / closing plate 289 is pressed by the sixth solenoid 86 between the timing T26 when the count value of the approach ball count counter (not shown) becomes “0” and the elapse of the discharge end time (for example, about 6 seconds). After repeating the opening / closing operation of moving from the open position to the closed position twice, the ball biting elimination operation control for maintaining the open position is performed, and then the discharge end time (for example, about 6 seconds) elapses at the timing T27, which is small. The control of the hit game state is ended, and the control of the big hit game state (the period before the opening of the big hit) is started. In addition to the ball biting elimination operation control, the release operation control for rotating the rotating body 208 in the reverse direction for a predetermined time may be performed.

Next, the flow {2/3} of the middle stage of the small hit game state common to the small hits 8 and 12 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56.

As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the CPU 103 uses the passage body motor 91 to move the movable passage at the timing T20 when a predetermined time (for example, about 80 seconds) has elapsed from the timing Ta0 when the control of the small hit game state is started. The body 400 is moved from the aisle body origin position to the aisle body advance position. Then, at the timing T22 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing T21 when the movement of the movable passage body 400 from the passage body origin position to the passage body advance position is completed, the first storage plate 222 is released from the storage position by the fourth solenoid 84. Move to.

Then, as shown in FIG. 55, when the game ball stored in the first storage unit 227 reaches the rotating body 208 and then enters and is held in the V winning ball holding unit 272, the rotating body 208 rotates. When the V winning ball holding unit 272 rotates above the V winning opening 283, it falls into the V winning opening 283 and is detected by the third count switch 24B, the CPU 103 determines that a V winning jackpot has occurred. ..

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 56, the CPU 103 moves the first storage plate 222 from the storage position to the release position by the fourth solenoid 84 at the timing T22, so that the game ball stored in the first storage unit 227 rotates. After reaching the body 208, if it is held by any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E, the V winning jackpot does not occur.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the CPU 103 takes a predetermined time from the timing T22 when the storage of the first storage unit 227 is released (for example, the game ball from which the storage of the first storage unit 227 is released is the second induction). At the timing T23 when the time required for flowing down the routes 202A and 202B, entering the V winning opening 283, and reaching the third count switch 24B) has elapsed, the movable passage body 400 is passed through the passage body by the passage body motor 91. Evacuate from the advance position to the origin position of the passage body. Then, at the timing T25 when a predetermined time elapses from the timing T24 when the movable passage body 400 reaches the origin position of the passage body, the operation of changing the distribution member 242 from the first rotation state to the second rotation state is repeated three times. As a result, the game ball P remaining in the second storage mechanism 205 can be guided to the rotating body 208 due to some trouble.

Further, the opening / closing plate 289 is moved from the closed position to the open position by the sixth solenoid 86 to open the discharge port 287. As a result, the support balls held by the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E are discharged from the discharge port 287.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, the CPU 103 opens the discharge port 287 in order to continue the above-mentioned opening control and storage mechanism control regardless of whether or not a V prize is generated in the first opening control. At the timing T30A where a predetermined period has elapsed from the timing T25 when the support ball is opened and the support ball is discharged, the second large winning opening door 702A is driven by the third solenoid 83 to start the second opening control based on the opening pattern D. .. As a result, the game ball can be won in the second large winning opening 702B.

Next, the flow {3/3} of the latter half of the small hit game state common to the small hits 8 and 12 will be described with reference to FIG. 57.

As shown in FIG. 57, the CPU 103 advances the movable passage body 400 from the origin position of the passage body to the passage body by the passage body motor 91 at the timing T30 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing T30A when the second opening control is started. Move to position. Then, at the timing T32 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing T31 when the movement of the movable passage body 400 from the passage body origin position to the passage body advance position is completed, the first storage plate 222 is released from the storage position by the fourth solenoid 84. Move to.

Then, when the game ball stored in the first storage unit 227 reaches the rotating body 208 and then enters and is held in the V winning ball holding unit 272, the rotation of the rotating body 208 causes the V winning ball holding unit 272. When is rotated above the V winning opening 283, it falls into the V winning opening 283 and is detected by the third count switch 24B, the CPU 103 determines that a V winning jackpot has occurred.

On the other hand, although not particularly shown, the CPU 103 moves the first storage plate 222 from the storage position to the release position by the fourth solenoid 84 at the timing T32, so that the game ball stored in the first storage unit 227 becomes the rotating body 208. If the ball is held by any of the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E after reaching the above, the V winning jackpot does not occur.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57, the CPU 103 takes a predetermined time from the timing T32 when the storage of the first storage unit 227 is released (for example, the game ball from which the storage of the first storage unit 227 is released is the second induction path 202A, At the timing T33 when (the time required to flow down 202B, enter the V winning opening 283, and reach the third count switch 24B) has elapsed, the movable passage body 400 is moved from the passage body advance position by the passage body motor 91. Retract to the origin position of the passage body. Then, at the timing T35 when a predetermined time elapses from the timing T34 when the movable passage body 400 reaches the origin position of the passage body, the operation of changing the distribution member 242 from the first rotation state to the second rotation state is repeated three times. As a result, the game ball P remaining in the second storage mechanism 205 can be guided to the rotating body 208 due to some trouble.

Further, the opening / closing plate 289 is moved from the closed position to the open position by the sixth solenoid 86 to open the discharge port 287. As a result, the support balls held by the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E are discharged from the discharge port 287.

Further, after starting the control of the small hit game state, the CPU 103 executes a process of adding and updating the count value of the approach ball number counter (not shown) every time the game ball is detected by the second count switch 24A. At the same time, every time the third count switch 24B for detecting the V winning ball and the fourth count switch 24C for detecting the lost ball detect a game ball, the count value of the approach ball counter (not shown) is subtracted and updated. Running.

Then, the count value of the approach ball count counter (not shown) became "0" between the timing T35 when the discharge port 287 was opened and the elapse of the discharge ball standby time (for example, 40 seconds), that is, At the timing T36 when the number of approaching balls entering the second special variable winning ball device 7B and the number of ejected balls (number of entering and exiting balls) match, all the game balls P entering the second major winning opening 702B are ejected. Judged as The discharge ball waiting time is indefinite, and the count value of the approach ball number counter (not shown) becomes "0", or the count value of the approach ball number counter (not shown) becomes "0". It ends when the seconds have passed.

Next, the opening / closing plate 289 is pressed by the sixth solenoid 86 between the timing T36 when the count value of the approach ball count counter (not shown) becomes “0” and the elapse of the discharge end time (for example, about 6 seconds). After repeating the opening / closing operation of moving from the open position to the closed position twice, the ball biting elimination operation control for maintaining the open position is performed, and then the discharge end time (for example, about 6 seconds) elapses at the timing T37, which is small. The control of the hit game state is ended, and the control of the big hit game state (the period before the opening of the big hit) is started. In addition to the ball biting elimination operation control, the release operation control for rotating the rotating body 208 in the reverse direction for a predetermined time may be performed.

As shown in FIG. 58, the CPU 103 has a timing in which the discharge ball standby time (for example, 40 seconds) elapses from the timing T25 (T35) when the discharge port 287 is opened, which is common to all the small hits 1 to 12. In TE, the count value of the approach ball count counter (not shown) did not reach "0" even though the ball biting elimination operation control was performed, that is, the ball that entered the second special variable winning ball device 7B. If the number and the number of ejected balls (the number of incoming and outgoing balls) do not match, it is determined that an error has occurred in which all the game balls P that have entered the second large winning opening 702B have not been ejected.

When the CPU 103 determines that an error of mismatch in the number of entrances and exits has occurred at the timing T28, the first lead path 201, the second lead path 202A, 202B, the third lead path 203A, 203B, the rotating body 208, and the first storage mechanism 204 , There is a possibility that an abnormality such as ball clogging (including ball clogging due to cheating using a non-spherical object as described in FIG. 49) has occurred in any of the second storage mechanisms 205. Assuming that there is, in the error processing on the main side of S22 shown in FIG. 34, predetermined error processing (for example, determination of error type, transmission setting of error specification command of S240 shown in FIG. 38, output setting of security signal, etc.) is performed. At the same time, in the information output process of S23, a process of outputting a security signal to the outside of the pachinko game machine 1 is executed in a manner corresponding to an error (abnormality).

The security signal has a relatively high priority, and an error (abnormality) that causes the game to stop is output until the power is turned off, whereas an error (abnormality) that has a relatively low priority is output. , It is output at a certain time after the error judgment, or it is not output. Regarding the "error of mismatch in the number of inflows and outflows" of the present embodiment, the security signal is output not only until the power is turned off but also for a certain period of time (for example, 4 minutes) after the power is turned on again. Is set to.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 displays an error notification image (not shown) indicating that an error has occurred on the image display device 5 based on the reception of the error designation command, and displays an error occurrence sound or the like on the speaker. The error notification process output from 8L and 8R is executed.

By ending the small hit game state after the discharge ball waiting time has elapsed, the CPU 103 does not shift to another special symbol process process (S301 to S307) before the discharge ball waiting time has elapsed. Therefore, the player is prevented from suffering a disadvantage due to the variable display of the special symbol or the start of the big hit game while the abnormality occurs.

(About various effects during the small hit game state)
Next, various effects during the small hit by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61. 59A and 59B are a table showing a winning promotion effect type, FIG. 59B is a diagram showing a promotion mode A, and FIG. 59C is a diagram showing a promotion mode B. FIG. 60 is a timing chart showing an operation example of the effect pattern A in (A), the effect pattern B (with V prize) in (B), and the effect pattern B (without V prize) in (C). 61 (A) and (B) are timing charts showing an operation example of the effect pattern C.

As shown in FIG. 59, during the small hit game, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the opening of the second large winning opening 702B in the first control and the opening of the second large winning opening 702B in the second control. The time gauge corresponding to the remaining period (predetermined period) of the opening period (predetermined period) of the second prize opening 702B is promoted while promoting the operation (operation) of launching the game ball aiming at the second prize opening 702B (Fig. 59 (B). ) (Refer to the part indicated by the diagonal line in (C)). A V-winning jackpot effect that can be executed after the release effect and the opening period (predetermined period) of the second large-winning opening 702B has elapsed, and indicates that the game ball has won the V-winning opening 283 and a V-winning jackpot has occurred. (Advantageous effect) and a loss effect indicating that the game ball did not win the V prize opening and the V prize jackpot did not occur can be executed.

First, the winning promotion effect executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be described with reference to FIGS. 59 to 61.

As shown in FIG. 59, when the opening control of the second large winning opening 702B is performed during the small hit game, the effect control CPU 120 wins a prize before the timing when the opening of the second large winning opening 702B is started. As the promotion effect image, an upward arrow image Z1 indicating that the second large winning opening 702B is above the image display device 5 in the display area of the image display device 5, and a character image Z2 "Aim at the top!" , The character image Z3 "Challenge" indicating that it is a chance to generate a V prize is displayed, and the speakers 8L and 8R output the voice and sound effect "Aim at the top!", And the game effect lamp. A time gauge image Z4 that can update the time gauge corresponding to the remaining period of the opening period of the second major winning opening 702B while encouraging the winning of the game ball to the second major winning opening 702B by lighting 9 or the like. By displaying the image, it is possible to promote the winning of the second large winning opening 702B and to perform the winning promotion effect of notifying the remaining period of the opening period.

As shown in FIG. 59 (A), the effect control CPU 120 can execute the winning promotion effect based on any of the effect patterns A to C.

Specifically, the effect pattern A is a pattern executed when the small hit type is any of 2, 4, 6, 10 or 7, 11 small hits, and the effect pattern B has a small hit type. The pattern is executed when any of the small hits 1, 3, 5, and 9, and the effect pattern C is a pattern executed when the small hit type is any of the small hits 8 and 12. ing. These effect patterns A to C have the same winning promotion effect image shown in FIGS. 59 (B) and 59 (C), but the update operation of the open period effect image, that is, the update operation mode of the time gauge is different.

In the effect pattern A, as shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 60 (A), the gauge is in the MAX state (predetermined) at the timing Ta1 before the timing Ta2 when the opening of the second large winning opening 702B is started. The time gauge image Z4 (the display mode of the display is a specific mode) is displayed, and the gauge is changed according to the remaining period of the opening period of the second prize opening 702B from the timing Ta2 when the opening of the second prize opening 702B is started. The time gauge image Z4 is erased after the gauge becomes "0", that is, the remaining period becomes "0" at the timing Ta3 when the opening period of the second large winning opening 702B ends. ..

In the present embodiment, in the case of the opening pattern A, the second large winning opening 702B is opened once, but in the case of the opening pattern B, the second large winning opening 702B is opened twice, and in the case of the opening pattern C. Since the second prize opening 702B opens three times, in the case of opening patterns B and C, an opening period including a plurality of opening periods (for example, from the start of the first opening to the end of the last opening). Although the embodiment in which the gauge is reduced according to the remaining period of the period) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time gauge image Z4 is displayed according to each opening to display the remaining period of each opening period. It may be displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), when the V winning is not generated at the timing Ta4 when the opening of the second large winning opening 702B is completed and the V winning determination is performed, the discharge of the support ball is completed. Loss effect (see FIG. 62 (G)) is performed until timing Ta5. Further, when the V prize occurs at the timing Ta4 when the opening of the second big prize opening 702B is completed and the V prize determination is performed, the V prize jackpot effect A (FIG. 62 (FIG. 62) F)) is performed.

In the effect pattern B, as shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 60 (B) (C), the gauge is MAX at the timing Ta1 before the timing Ta2 when the opening of the second large winning opening 702B is started. The time gauge image Z4 of the state is displayed, and the gauge gradually decreases according to the remaining period of the opening period of the second large winning opening 702B from the timing Ta2 when the opening of the second large winning opening 702B is started. At the timing Ta3 when the opening period of the two major winning openings 702B ends (closes), the gauge is more than "0" and less than "MAX", that is, the time gauge image Z4 is such that the remaining period remains. The display of is maintained.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), at the timing Ta4 in which the V prize determination for whether or not the V prize has occurred is performed, if the V prize occurs, the time gauge image Z4 is erased, and the V prize jackpot effect is produced. Move to. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), if the V prize does not occur at the timing Ta4, the display of the time gauge image Z4 is maintained, and the time gauge image Z4 is displayed at the timing Ta5 when the discharge of the support ball ends. It will be erased.

As shown in FIG. 60B, when the V winning occurs at the timing Ta4 when the opening of the second large winning opening 702B is completed and the V winning determination is performed, the timing Ta5 at which the discharge of the support ball ends. When the V winning jackpot production A is performed up to, and as shown in FIG. 60 (C), the V winning is not generated at the timing Ta4 when the opening of the second winning opening 702B is completed and the V winning judgment is performed. , The loss effect is performed until the timing Ta5 when the discharge of the support ball ends.

As shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 61 (A) and (B), the effect pattern C is gauged at the timing Ta1 before the timing Ta2 when the first opening of the second large winning opening 702B is started. The time gauge image Z4 in the state of MAX is displayed, and the gauge gradually changes according to the remaining period of the opening period of the second prize opening 702B from the timing Ta2 when the first opening of the second prize opening 702B is started. It seems that the gauge is more than "0" and less than "MAX" at the timing Ta3 when the opening period of the second prize opening 702B ends (closes), that is, the remaining period remains. The display of the time gauge image Z4 is maintained in the remaining mode.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 61 (A) and 61 (B), the support ball is discharged regardless of whether or not the V prize is generated at the timing Ta4 at which the V prize determination is performed to determine whether or not the V prize has occurred. After the end timing Ta5, the display of the time gauge image Z4 is maintained until the timing Ta6 before the timing Ta7 when the second opening of the second large winning opening 702B is started, and the gauge remains at the timing T6. The display is changed to the time gauge image Z4 in the mode in which the mode returns to "MAX".

Then, from the timing Ta7 when the second opening of the second large winning opening 702B is started, the gauge gradually decreases according to the remaining period of the opening period of the second large winning opening 702B, and the second large winning opening 702B At the timing Ta8 when the opening period of is completed (closed), the time gauge image Z4 is erased after the gauge becomes "0", that is, the remaining period becomes "0".

As shown in FIG. 61 (A), when the V winning is not generated at the timing Ta4 when the first opening of the second large winning opening 702B is completed and the V winning determination is made, the support ball is ejected. Loss effect is performed until the timing Ta5 when the end of. In addition, if a V prize occurs at the timing Ta9 when the second opening of the second big prize opening 702B is completed and the V prize judgment is performed, the V prize jackpot effect A is performed until the timing Ta10 when the discharge of the support ball ends. Will be done.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), when the V prize occurs at the timing Ta4 when the first opening of the second large prize opening 702B is completed and the V prize determination is performed, the second large prize opening is opened. After the second opening of the 702B is completed, the V winning jackpot effect B (see FIG. 64 (D)), which is different from the V winning jackpot effect A, is performed until the timing Ta10 when the discharge of the support ball is completed.

Here, in the small hits 2, 4, 6, and 10 corresponding to the effect pattern A, the second large winning opening 702B is opened twice in the first control, and the small hits 7 and 11 are the first in the first control. The two major winning openings 702B will be opened three times. For the small hits 1, 3, 5, and 9 corresponding to the effect pattern B, the second large winning opening 702B is opened once in the first control. For the small hits 8 and 12 corresponding to the production pattern C, after the second big winning opening 702B is opened once in the first control, the second big winning opening 702B is newly opened in the second control. It will be done once more.

That is, the small hits 1, 3, 5, 9 and the small hits 8, 12 are opened once at the same timing as the second big winning opening 702B in the first control, so that the player can use the second big winning opening. It is difficult to determine whether the small hit type is small hit 1, 3, 5, 9 or small hit 8, 12 by the opening pattern of 702B. Then, in the effect pattern B, the time gauge image Z4 is erased at the timing Ta4 at which the V winning determination is performed and the timing Ta5 at which the discharge of the support ball ends, and the gauge remains (a predetermined mode different from the specific mode). While the pattern does not return from the "MAX" mode (specific mode) to the "MAX" mode (non-specific mode), the effect pattern C is the timing Ta4 at which the V winning determination is performed and the timing Ta5 at which the discharge of the support ball ends. At the timing Ta6 where the display of the time gauge image Z4 is continued and the second opening is performed, the "MAX" mode of the timing Ta1 (a predetermined mode different from the specific mode) of the gauge at the time of the timing Ta3 It is a pattern that returns to (specific mode).

However, the effect pattern B and the effect pattern C are lost because the time gauge image Z4 in a common mode in which the gauge remains is displayed at least at the timing Ta3 when the opening period of the second large winning opening 702B ends. In the case of, the time gauge may return to the "MAX" mode at the timing Ta6 by continuously displaying up to the timing Ta5, that is, the second big winning opening 702B may be opened again. (Chance of V prize) is suggested. Therefore, if the V prize is not generated in the first control, the player can perform the second control at least until the timing Ta5 even if the small hit types are the small hits 1, 3, 5, and 9. Since it can be expected, the player's willingness to play can be maintained.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B), in the effect patterns A to C, the mode of the prize promotion effect image displayed from before the opening period of the second large winning opening 702B to the end of the opening period is as follows. As shown in FIG. 59 (B), the promotion mode A is composed of the arrow image Z1, the character image Z2, and the Z3. When a V prize is generated, the mode of the prize promotion effect image displayed from before the second opening period of the second large winning opening 702B in the second control until the end of the opening period is as shown in FIG. 59 (C). In addition, the promotion mode B is composed of only the arrow image Z1A which is smaller than the arrow image Z1 (the mode is different from that of the arrow image Z1). That is, when the V prize is generated by the first opening of the second large winning opening 702B, it is not necessary to aim for the V winning by the second opening of the second large winning opening 702B, so that the second large winning opening 702B Although it is not necessary to promote the winning of the game ball to the player in a conspicuous manner, since the prize ball can be obtained by winning the game ball, the arrow image Z1A in a mode that is less conspicuous than the arrow image Z1. Only is displayed to notify that it is open.

In the present embodiment, the winning promotion effect image performed in response to the second opening control of the second large winning opening 702B in the effect pattern C is the effect pattern when the V prize occurs in the first control. It is displayed in the promotion mode B, which is less conspicuous than the promotion mode A of the prize promotion effect image performed in response to the first opening control of the second large prize opening 702B in C, that is, the prize promotion effect corresponding to the second control. By limiting the execution, it is possible to prevent the player from being distrusted by the promotion of the winning again even though the V winning has occurred.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when a V prize is generated in the first control, the promotion mode B is set to be less conspicuous than the promotion mode A as an example of limiting the execution of the prize promotion effect corresponding to the second control. (For example, the arrow image Z1 is made smaller or the character images Z2 and Z3 are erased), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the form and size of the arrow images Z1 and the character images Z2 and Z3 are not limited to this. By changing the brightness, color, and the like without changing the size, the promotion mode B may be made less noticeable than the promotion mode A. Further, limiting the execution of the winning promotion effect corresponding to the second control not only makes the promotion mode B of the second control less conspicuous than the promotion mode A of the first control, as described above, but also the first. 2 The visibility of the control promotion mode B is made more difficult than that of the first control promotion mode A, the second control promotion mode B is made more difficult to specify than the first control promotion mode A, or the second control is supported. This includes not executing the winning promotion effect. When a V prize is generated in the first control, it is not necessary to limit the execution of the prize promotion effect corresponding to the second control. For example, the prize promotion effect corresponding to the second control corresponds to the first control. It may be carried out in substantially the same mode as the promotion mode A described above.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timing for starting the display of the time gauge image Z4 in the winning promotion effect is set to the timing Ta1 slightly before the timing Ta2 when the second large winning opening 702B is opened. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be the timing Ta2 at which the second special winning opening 702B opens.

(Flow of production during small hit game state)
Next, the flow of the effect during the small hit game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 64. 62 (A) to (G) are explanatory views showing the flow of each effect (in the case of the winning promotion effect pattern A) during the small hit game. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of each effect (in the case of winning promotion effect patterns B and C) during the small hit game. FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of each effect (in the case of the winning promotion effect pattern C) during the small hit game, where (A) to (D) and (A') to (D') are shown.

First, in any of the small hits 2, 4, 6, 10 and the small hits 7 and 11, when the winning promotion effect based on the effect pattern A is performed, a small hit occurs as shown in FIG. 62 (A). When controlled to the small hit game state, the effect control CPU 120 uses the arrow image Z1 as the winning promotion effect image as shown in FIG. 62 (B) before the opening of the second large winning opening 702B is started. , Character images Z2, Z3, and time gauge image Z4 are started to be displayed. As shown in FIG. 62 (C), during the opening period of the second large winning opening 702B, the gauge is gradually reduced according to the remaining opening period while maintaining the display of the arrow images Z1, the character images Z2, and Z3. When the storage of the second storage mechanism 205 is released, the display of the arrow image Z1 and the character image Z2 is erased and the second storage release effect image Z5 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 62 (D), when the opening of the second large winning opening 702B is completed, the arrow image Z1 and the character image Z2 of the time gauge image Z4 are erased, and the storage of the second storage mechanism 205 is released. Occasionally, the display of the arrow image Z1 and the character image Z2 is erased to display the second storage release effect image Z5, and the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound or sound effect such as "second storage ball release!" , By turning on the game effect lamp 9, etc., the player is notified that the support ball has been released.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (E), when the storage of the first storage mechanism 204 is released, the first storage release effect image Z6 is displayed, and the speakers 8L and 8R "release the first storage ball!" The player is notified that the game ball has been released by outputting a sound or sound effect, turning on the game effect lamp 9, and the like.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), when a V-winning jackpot occurs, the character image Z3 is erased and a V-winning jackpot effect image Z7 for notifying that a V-winning jackpot has occurred is displayed. , The speaker 8L, 8R outputs a voice or sound effect of "V jackpot!", Turns on the game effect lamp 9, etc., to notify the player that a V prize has occurred. Start.

Further, as shown in FIG. 62 (G), when the V prize does not occur, the character image Z3 is erased and the loss effect image Z8 for notifying that the V prize has not occurred is displayed. , By outputting "unfortunate" voices and sound effects with the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on the game effect lamp 9, etc., to start a loss effect to notify the player that the V prize jackpot did not occur. ..

Next, in any of the small hits 1, 3, 5, 9 and the small hits 8 and 12, when the winning promotion effect based on the effect pattern B or the effect pattern C is performed, as shown in FIG. 63 (A). When a small hit occurs and is controlled to the small hit gaming state, the effect control CPU 120 performs the winning promotion effect as shown in FIG. 63 (B) before the opening of the second large winning opening 702B is started. The display of the arrow image Z1, the character image Z2, Z3, and the time gauge image Z4 as images is started. As shown in FIG. 63 (C), during the opening period of the second large winning opening 702B, the gauge is gradually reduced according to the remaining opening period while maintaining the display of the arrow images Z1, the character images Z2, and Z3. When the storage of the second storage mechanism 205 is released, the display of the arrow image Z1 and the character image Z2 is erased and the second storage release effect image Z5 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 63 (D), when the opening of the second large winning opening 702B is completed, the arrow image Z1 and the character image Z2 are deleted while displaying the time gauge image Z4 in which the gauge remains. , When the storage of the second storage mechanism 205 is released, the second storage release effect image Z5 is displayed, and the speakers 8L and 8R output the sound and sound effect of "the second storage ball is released!" By turning on the effect lamp 9 or the like, the player is notified that the support ball has been released.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (E), when the storage of the first storage mechanism 204 is released while displaying the time gauge image Z4 in the mode in which the gauge remains, the first storage release effect image Z6 is displayed. In addition to displaying, the speakers 8L and 8R output a voice or sound effect such as "Release the first storage ball!", Or turn on the game effect lamp 9 to notify the player that the game ball has been released. do.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (F), when a V-winning jackpot occurs, the time gauge image Z4 and the character image Z3 are erased to notify that the V-winning jackpot has occurred. V that notifies the player that a V prize has occurred by displaying Z7, outputting a sound or sound effect such as "V big hit!" By the speakers 8L and 8R, and turning on the game effect lamp 9. Winning jackpot production A is started.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), when the V prize does not occur, the character image Z3 is erased while the time gauge image Z4 in the mode in which the gauge remains is displayed, and the V prize occurs. By displaying the loss effect image Z8 to notify that it was not done, outputting "unfortunate" voices and sound effects with the speakers 8L and 8R, turning on the game effect lamp 9, etc., the V prize jackpot Starts a loss effect to notify the player that the occurrence has not occurred.

Next, in the winning promotion production based on the production pattern C, when the V prize is not generated (loss) at the first opening of the second large winning opening 702B, the gauge is as shown in FIG. 64 (A). After starting the loss effect of displaying the loss effect image Z8 for notifying that the V prize has not occurred by erasing the character image Z3 while displaying the time gauge image Z4 of the aspect in which As shown in FIG. 64 (B), the arrow images Z1, the character images Z2, Z3, and the time gauge image Z4 are displayed as the winning promotion effect images before the second opening of the second large winning opening 702B is started. To start. Although not particularly shown, during the second opening period of the second large winning opening 702B, the gauge is gradually reduced according to the remaining opening period while maintaining the display of the arrow images Z1, the character images Z2, and Z3. At the same time, when the storage of the second storage mechanism 205 is released, the display of the arrow image Z1 and the character image Z2 is erased and the second storage release effect image Z5 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 64 (C), when the opening of the second large winning opening 702B is completed, the time gauge image Z4, the arrow image Z1, and the character image Z2 in the mode in which the gauge remains are erased, and the second storage is performed. When the storage of the mechanism 205 is released, the second storage release effect image Z5 is displayed, the speakers 8L and 8R output the sound and sound effect of "the second storage ball is released!", And the game effect lamp 9 is turned on. The player is notified that the support ball has been released by lighting or the like. Next, when the storage of the first storage mechanism 204 is released, the first storage release effect image Z6 is displayed, and the speakers 8L and 8R output a voice or sound effect of "1st storage ball release!" By turning on the game effect lamp 9 or the like, the player is notified that the game ball has been released.

Then, as shown in FIG. 64 (D), when a V-winning jackpot occurs, a V-winning jackpot effect image Z7A for notifying that a V-winning jackpot has occurred is displayed, or "V" is displayed by the speakers 8L and 8R. By outputting a voice or sound effect such as "Big hit!" Or turning on the game effect lamp 9, the V winning big hit effect B for notifying the player that a V winning has occurred is started.

The V-winning jackpot effect B displays the V-winning jackpot effect image Z7A, which has a different display mode (for example, different characters) from the V-winning jackpot effect image Z7 of the V-winning jackpot effect A. In this way, the V prize is generated when the first second large prize opening 702B is opened in the first control and the V prize is generated when the second second large prize opening 702B is opened in the second control. By making the display mode of the V winning jackpot production image different from that when It is possible to more effectively notify that a prize has been generated (revived and won a V prize).

In the present embodiment, when a V prize is generated by opening the first second large winning opening 702B in the first control, and when the second large winning opening 702B is opened in the second control. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. , Color, shape, size, etc.) may be different. In addition, a V prize is generated when the first second large winning opening 702B is opened in the first control and a V prize is generated when the second second large winning opening 702B is opened in the second control. You may use the V prize jackpot effect image of the same aspect as when it is done.

Further, although not shown in particular, when the V prize does not occur, a loss effect image Z8 for notifying that the V prize has not occurred is displayed, and the speakers 8L and 8R provide "unfortunate" sounds and effects. By outputting a sound, turning on the game effect lamp 9, and the like, a loss effect is started to notify the player that the V prize jackpot has not occurred.

On the other hand, in the winning promotion effect based on the effect pattern C, when a V prize occurs at the first opening of the second large winning opening 702B, as shown in FIG. 64 (A'), the time gauge image Z4 and the character image V-winning jackpot effect B that erases Z3, displays the V-winning jackpot effect image Z7 for notifying that a V-winning has occurred, and displays the effect pattern in full rotation (see FIG. 64 (B')). To start.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), in the case of small hits 8 and 12, the CPU 103 has a second pattern of performing the second control regardless of whether or not the first control is executed. Since the opening control and the storage mechanism control are performed, in the winning promotion effect based on the effect pattern C, if a V prize occurs at the first opening of the second large winning opening 702B, the V winning big hit effect B is performed. Although it starts, in the second opening control of the second big winning opening 702B, even if the game ball enters the V winning opening 283, the V winning does not occur, so the second opening control of the second big winning opening 702B (the second opening control). While limiting the execution of the winning promotion effect corresponding to 1 control), the V winning jackpot effect B is produced for a long period of time from the timing Ta4 when the V winning jackpot effect B is started to the end of the second control (small hit game). The full rotation display of the symbol is continuously performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect from being delayed from the timing when the V prize is generated until the end of the second control.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (B'), the arrow image Z1A and the time gauge image Z4 are started to be displayed as the winning promotion effect images before the second opening of the second large winning opening 702B is started. As shown in FIG. 64 (C'), during the second opening period of the second large winning opening 702B, the gauge is gradually reduced according to the remaining opening period while maintaining the display of the arrow image Z1A. , As shown in FIG. 64 (D'), when the opening of the second large winning opening 702B is completed, the time gauge image Z4 and the arrow image Z1A are erased.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the opening control of the second big winning opening 702B is performed in the small hit game state, the time gauge image Z4 is displayed and the gauge corresponds to the remaining period of the opening period. Can be notified to the player of the remaining period of the open period by displaying a decrease in, but as described above, in the small hits 1, 3, 5, 9 and the small hits 8, 12, the second in the first control Since the big winning opening 702B is opened once in the same way, it is difficult for the player to determine the small hit type until the second opening control of the second big winning opening 702B is started by the second control. Is.

Then, in the effect pattern B corresponding to the small hits 1, 3, 5 and 9 in the prize promotion effect and the effect pattern C corresponding to the small hits 8 and 12, at least the opening control of the second large winning opening 702B is completed (closed). ) At the timing Ta3, the time gauge image Z4 in a mode in which the gauge remains is displayed, so that the opening period of the second large winning opening 702B has not yet ended, that is, the second control Since it is suggested that the second opening control of the two major winning openings 702B may be performed, at least the opening control of the second major winning opening 702B is completed (closed) even in the case of small hits 1, 3, 5, and 9. It can be expected that the second opening control of the second winning opening 702B will be performed until the timing Ta3. Therefore, the player's willingness to play can be suitably sustained.

(First invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the first invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine capable of imparting an advantageous value (for example, a jackpot gaming state) to a player based on the fact that a gaming ball that has entered a predetermined region has passed through a specific region, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-213200. It is possible to store a game medium guided to a specific route capable of passing through a specific area among the game media that have entered a predetermined area, such as those described in the publications, etc., and the stored game medium can store the game medium. , Other game media that have entered the predetermined area are guided to the predetermined route, and the ratio of the game medium stored in the specific route to pass through the specific area is changed by the other game media guided to the predetermined route. there were. In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, there is a problem that the winning / failing lottery as to whether or not the gaming medium guided to the specific route passes through the specific area is monotonous, and the interest is insufficient. Therefore, with the aim of providing a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the first invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
Variable means (for example, the second special variable winning ball device 7B) capable of changing to an enterable state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball P) can enter, and
A variable control means capable of controlling the variable means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the processes of steps S118 to 120 shown in FIG. 35) and
With
A predetermined area through which the game medium that has entered the variable means can pass (for example, the second large winning opening 702B) and
A specific area (for example, V winning opening 283) through which the game medium that has passed through the predetermined area can pass is provided.
It is possible to give an advantageous value to the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area, and the ratio of the game medium passing through the specific area differs depending on the number of game media that have passed through the predetermined area (for example). Since the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 702B is different depending on the small hit type, the number of game balls P stored by the second storage mechanism 205 is different, and the game balls stored by the second storage mechanism 205 are different. The number of Ps, that is, the number of support balls held by the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E is different, and the V winning rate (big hit probability) changes accordingly),
The variable control means
A first pattern for performing the first control for allowing the game medium to pass through the predetermined area, and a second pattern for performing the second control for allowing the game medium to pass through the predetermined area again after performing the first control. The variable means can be controlled by any one of a plurality of types of patterns including, (for example, the CPU 103 is in a small hit gaming state, small hits 1, 3, 5, 9, small hits 2, 4, 6). In the case of 10, small hits 7 and 11, the second special variable winning ball device 7B is controlled based on the first pattern, and in the case of small hits 8 and 12, the second special variable winning ball is controlled based on the second pattern. The part that controls the ball device 7B),
In the second pattern, the second control is performed regardless of whether or not the game medium that has passed through the predetermined area by the first control has passed through the specific area (for example, the CPU 103 performs the second control in the second pattern. In both the case where the game ball (game ball) enters the V winning opening 283 in the first control and the case where the game ball (game ball) does not enter the V winning opening 283 in the first control, that is, the V winning is won. The part that executes the second control regardless of whether or not the occurrence of
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the variable means may be controlled not only by the first control but also by the second pattern in which the second control is performed, so that the game interest can be improved.
In addition, by executing the second control regardless of whether or not a V prize has occurred in the first control, common storage mechanism control process data corresponding to all small hit types can be obtained for the storage mechanism control. It can be used. Therefore, even if a plurality of storage mechanism control process data corresponding to each small hit type is not prepared, one storage mechanism control process data can be shared by all small hits, so that the data capacity is suitable. At the same time, the processing load of the CPU 103 can be reduced.
In the present embodiment, a mode in which common storage mechanism control process data corresponding to all small hit types is used for storage mechanism control is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each small hit type is used. Control may be performed using individual storage mechanism control process data according to the hit type.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
A storage means (for example, a second storage mechanism 205) capable of storing a game medium (for example, a game ball P) that has passed through the predetermined area (for example, the second special winning opening 702B) is provided.
The rate at which the game medium passes through the specific area (for example, V winning opening 283) differs depending on the number of gaming media stored in the storage means (for example, the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 702B depending on the small hit type). The number of game balls P stored by the second storage mechanism 205 is different, and the number of game balls P stored by the second storage mechanism 205, that is, the number of game balls P stored by the lost ball holding portions 273A to 273E is different. The number of support balls is different, and the V winning rate (big hit probability) changes accordingly)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player can pay attention to the stored state of the game medium, so that the game entertainment can be further improved.

The gaming machine of the means 3 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to the means 2.
In the first control, the variable control means performs the second control at a higher rate when the number of game media stored in the storage means is small than when the number of game media stored in the storage means is large. (For example, when the CPU 103 performs the first control, the number of support balls is small (one support ball), and the small hits are 8 and 12, the number of support balls is large when the first control is performed (for example). 3 or 5 support balls) A part that performs the second control at a higher rate (100% probability) than in the case of small hits 2, 4, 6, 10 and small hits 7, 11)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, even if the number of game media passing through the predetermined region in the first control is small, the expectation that the second control is performed can be increased.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
A specific effect (for example, a V winning jackpot effect) that can be executed in a plurality of different modes based on the passage of the game medium (for example, the game ball P) through the specific area (for example, V winning opening 283). An execution means (for example, a CPU 120 for effect control) is provided.
The specific effect executing means is specified in different manners when the game medium entered by the first control passes through the specific area and when the game medium entered by the second control passes through the specific area. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 generates a V prize by opening the first second big prize opening 702B in the first control, the V prize jackpot effect A is executed and the second control is performed. When a V prize is generated by opening the second prize opening 702B for the second time, the part where the V prize jackpot effect B is executed. See FIGS. 64 (D) and 64 (A')).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the first invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The promotion effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the promotion effect for promoting the entry of the game medium into the variable means in response to the first control and the second control) during the small hit game. An operation (operation) of causing a player to shoot a game ball aiming at the second prize opening 702B in response to the opening of the second prize opening 702B in the first control and the opening of the second prize opening 702B in the second control. A part for executing a winning promotion effect. See FIGS. 60 and 61).
When the gaming medium entered by the first control in the second pattern passes through the specific area, the promotion effect executing means limits the execution of the promotion effect corresponding to the second control in the second pattern ( For example, when the effect control CPU 120 produces a winning promotion effect image corresponding to the second opening control of the second large winning opening 702B in the effect pattern C, and a V prize occurs in the first control, the effect pattern A portion displayed in the promotion mode B, which is less conspicuous than the promotion mode A of the prize promotion effect image performed in response to the first opening control of the second large prize opening 702B in C. See FIGS. 59 (B) and 59 (C)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the promotion effect being performed even though the addition of advantageous value is decided.

(Second invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the second invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine in which a gaming medium flowing down a predetermined flow path can enter the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device, for example, as described in JP-A-2017-93541. In some cases, the launch promotion notification is given by reducing and updating the gauge corresponding to each of the opening control period of the first variable winning device and the opening control period of the second variable winning device. The gaming machine described in the patent gazette has a problem that the effect of displaying the display corresponding to the opening control period (predetermined period) is insufficient. Therefore, with the aim of providing a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the second invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
An advantageous effect corresponding to the content advantageous to the player (for example, a V winning big hit effect / a large hit confirmation notification effect of the modified example 1) is set for a predetermined period (for example, an opening period of the second large winning opening 702B / a push of the modified example 1). It is possible to execute after the elapse of the operation valid period of the button 31B), and a predetermined effect including an update operation of a predetermined display (for example, time gauge image Z4 / time gauge image Z34 of the modification 1) corresponding to the remaining period of the predetermined period. (For example, the effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the prize promotion effect / the button operation effect of the modification 1) is provided.
The effect executing means is
A first pattern (for example, effect pattern B / effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4 of the modified example 1) in which the display mode of the predetermined display is not a specific mode after the elapse of the predetermined period, and a predetermined period after the elapse of the predetermined period. With the second pattern (for example, effect pattern C / effect pattern PT-3, PT-5, PT-6 of the modified example 1) in which the display mode of the predetermined display is a specific mode in response to the newly set It is possible to execute a predetermined effect with any of a plurality of types of patterns including,
In both the first pattern and the second pattern, it is suggested that the predetermined period is newly set by making the display mode of the predetermined display a common mode when the predetermined period elapses (for example,). The effect control CPU 120 controls the opening of at least the second large winning opening 702B in the effect pattern B corresponding to the small hits 1, 3, 5 and 9 in the prize promotion effect and the effect pattern C corresponding to the small hits 8 and 12. At the timing Ta3 when the operation is completed (closed), the time gauge image Z4 in a mode in which the gauge remains is displayed, so that the second opening control of the second large winning opening 702B is performed in the second control. Part suggesting the possibility. See FIGS. 59 to 61 / In the first modification, the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4 and the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5 and PT-6 are at least the first operation. From the timing Ta4 to the timing Ta5 when the validity period ends, the operation validity period may be set once more by continuing to display the time gauge image Z34 in a common mode in which the gauge remains. Suggested part. See FIGS. 66-68)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player expects that a predetermined period is newly set, so that the game entertainment can be improved.
Specifically, when the predetermined period has elapsed, the predetermined display is displayed in a common manner in both the first pattern and the second pattern, so that the player can display the predetermined display even in the case of the first pattern. Since it can be expected that it will be changed and a predetermined period will be newly set, it is possible to maintain the motivation to play.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
A variable means (for example, a second special variable winning ball device 7B) that can be changed to an enterable state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball P) can enter is provided.
A predetermined area through which the game medium that has entered the variable means can pass (for example, the second large winning opening 702B) and
A specific area (for example, V winning opening 283) through which the game medium that has passed through the predetermined area can pass is provided.
It is possible to give an advantageous value to the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (for example, when the V winning ball holding portion 272 rotates and reaches the position corresponding to the V winning opening 283, the game is played. The ball P1 enters the V winning opening 283 and is detected by the third count switch 24B to generate a V winning),
The predetermined period is characterized in that it is a period corresponding to a period in which the variable means is controlled to be in the accessible state (for example, an opening period of the second large winning opening 702B).
According to this feature, the player expects that the variable means is newly controlled so that the variable means can enter, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2.
In both the first pattern and the second pattern, the effect executing means can change the display mode of the predetermined display to a display mode in which the predetermined period remains after the predetermined period has elapsed. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 has a time gauge in a common mode such that the gauge remains in the effect pattern B and the effect pattern C at least at the timing Ta3 when the opening period of the second special winning opening 702B ends. A portion for displaying the image Z4. See FIG. 63 / In the first modification, even when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4 for which the second operation valid period is not set, at least the first time. At the timing Ta4 at which the operation valid period of the above has expired, the time gauge image Z34 is displayed in the same manner as the time gauge image Z34 in the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, and PT-6. FIG. 67 (B). reference)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player expects that the predetermined display returns to the previous mode, so that the interest can be improved.
Specifically, by displaying the predetermined display in such a manner that the predetermined period remains, it is possible to make it appear that the predetermined period continues without elapse, so that a new predetermined period is set. It is possible to preferably improve the feeling of expectation for the matter.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The effect executing means can execute an operation promotion effect that encourages the player's operation in response to a predetermined period (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a second big winning opening in the first control during the small hit game. In response to the opening of the 702B and the opening of the second large winning opening 702B in the second control, a winning promotion effect for promoting the operation (operation) of launching the game ball aiming at the second large winning opening 702B is executed. Part. Refer to FIG. 59 / In the first modification, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a button operation effect for urging the player to operate the push button 31B according to the operation validity period of the push button 31B. FIG. 67. reference)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The predetermined period is a motion detection period in which the player's motion can be detected (for example, the operation valid period of the push button 31B in the modification 1).
The operation detection period can be set a plurality of times within a specific period (for example, a variable display period) (for example, in the modification 1, the effect control CPU 120 sets the operation valid period twice in the button operation effect. Production pattern PT-3, PT-5, PT-6 can be executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player expects that the predetermined display returns to the previous mode, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The effect executing means is
In the first pattern and the second pattern, the predetermined display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has the effect pattern B and the effect pattern C in the second large winning opening 702B. In the part / modification example 1 in which the display of the time gauge image Z4 in such a manner that the gauge remains from the timing Ta3 at which the opening control of the above is completed (closed) to the timing Ta4 at which the V winning determination is performed is continued, the effect control is performed. In the effect patterns PT-2, PT-4 and the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, PT-6, the gauge remains from the timing Ta4 to the timing Ta5 when the first operation valid period ends. The part that continues to display the time gauge image Z34 in a common aspect),
The predetermined effect can be executed in the third pattern in which the predetermined display is erased when the predetermined period elapses or before the predetermined period elapses (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has the second major winning opening in the effect pattern A). A portion where the time gauge image Z4 is erased at the timing Ta3 when the opening control of the 702B is completed (closed). See FIGS. 60 and 61 / In the first modification, the effect control CPU 120 is the first time in the effect pattern PT-1. The part where the time gauge image Z34 is erased at the timing Ta4 when the operation validity period of the above has expired. See FIG. 68).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player expects that the predetermined display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined period has elapsed, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the second invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6.
The effect executing means continuously displays the predetermined display even after the predetermined period has elapsed, regardless of whether or not the predetermined effect is executed in the second pattern (for example, newly determined after the predetermined period has elapsed). Even in the effect pattern A in which the period is not set and the effect pattern PT-1 of the modification example 1, that is, regardless of whether or not the predetermined effect is executed in the second pattern, the predetermined display is displayed even after the elapse of the predetermined period. The part to be displayed continuously. Modification example)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player expects that the predetermined display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined period has elapsed, so that the interest can be improved.

(Third invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the following third invention. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine in which a gaming medium flowing down a predetermined flow path can enter the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device, for example, as described in JP-A-2017-93541. In some cases, the launch promotion notification is given by reducing and updating the gauge corresponding to each of the opening control period of the first variable winning device and the opening control period of the second variable winning device. The gaming machine described in the patent gazette has a problem that the effect of displaying the display corresponding to the opening control period (predetermined period) is insufficient. Therefore, with the aim of providing a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the game,
The gaming machine of means 1 of the third invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1).
An advantageous effect corresponding to the content advantageous to the player (for example, a V winning big hit effect / a large hit confirmation notification effect of the modified example 1) is set for a predetermined period (for example, an opening period of the second large winning opening 702B / a push of the modified example 1). It is possible to execute after the elapse of the operation valid period of the button 31B), and a predetermined effect including an update operation of a predetermined display (for example, time gauge image Z4 / time gauge image Z34 of the modification 1) corresponding to the remaining period of the predetermined period. (For example, the effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing the prize promotion effect / the button operation effect of the modification 1) is provided.
The effect executing means is
A first pattern (for example, effect pattern B / effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4 of the modified example 1) in which the display mode of the predetermined display is not a specific mode after the elapse of the predetermined period, and a predetermined period after the elapse of the predetermined period. With the second pattern (for example, effect pattern C / effect pattern PT-3, PT-5, PT-6 of the modified example 1) in which the display mode of the predetermined display is a specific mode in response to the newly set It is possible to execute a predetermined effect with any of a plurality of types of patterns including,
In both the first pattern and the second pattern, it is suggested that the predetermined period is newly set by making the display mode of the predetermined display a common mode when the predetermined period elapses (for example,). The effect control CPU 120 controls the opening of at least the second large winning opening 702B in the effect pattern B corresponding to the small hits 1, 3, 5 and 9 in the prize promotion effect and the effect pattern C corresponding to the small hits 8 and 12. At the timing Ta3 when the operation is completed (closed), the time gauge image Z4 in a mode in which the gauge remains is displayed, so that the second opening control of the second large winning opening 702B is performed in the second control. Part suggesting the possibility. See FIGS. 59 to 61 / In the first modification, the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4 and the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5 and PT-6 are at least the first operation. From the timing Ta4 to the timing Ta5 when the validity period ends, the operation validity period may be set once more by continuing to display the time gauge image Z34 in a common mode in which the gauge remains. Suggested part. See FIGS. 66-68),
It is possible to execute an operation promotion effect that encourages the player's operation in response to a predetermined period (for example, the effect control CPU 120 opens the second large winning opening 702B in the first control and the second during the small hit game. In the part / modification 1 that executes a winning promotion effect that promotes an operation (operation) for the player to shoot a game ball aiming at the second winning opening 702B in response to the opening of the second winning opening 702B in the control. , The part where the effect control CPU 120 can execute a button operation effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B according to the operation validity period of the push button 31B).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player expects that a predetermined period is newly set, so that the game entertainment can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
A variable means (for example, a second special variable winning ball device 7B) that can be changed to an enterable state (for example, an open state) in which a game medium (for example, a game ball P) can enter is provided.
A predetermined area through which the game medium that has entered the variable means can pass (for example, the second large winning opening 702B) and
A specific area (for example, V winning opening 283) through which the game medium that has passed through the predetermined area can pass is provided.
It is possible to give an advantageous value to the player based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific area (for example, when the V winning ball holding portion 272 rotates and reaches the position corresponding to the V winning opening 283, the game is played. The ball P1 enters the V winning opening 283 and is detected by the third count switch 24B to generate a V winning),
The predetermined period is characterized in that it is a period corresponding to a period in which the variable means is controlled to be in the accessible state (for example, an opening period of the second large winning opening 702B).
According to this feature, the player expects that the variable means is newly controlled so that the variable means can enter, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2.
In both the first pattern and the second pattern, the effect executing means can change the display mode of the predetermined display to a display mode in which the predetermined period remains after the predetermined period has elapsed. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 has a time gauge in a common mode such that the gauge remains in the effect pattern B and the effect pattern C at least at the timing Ta3 when the opening period of the second special winning opening 702B ends. A portion for displaying the image Z4. See FIG. 63 / In the first modification, even when the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4 for which the second operation valid period is not set, at least the first time. At the timing Ta4 at which the operation valid period of the above has expired, the time gauge image Z34 is displayed in the same manner as the time gauge image Z34 in the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, and PT-6. FIG. 67 (B). reference)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player expects that the predetermined display returns to the previous mode, so that the interest can be improved.
Specifically, by displaying the predetermined display in such a manner that the predetermined period remains, it is possible to make it appear that the predetermined period continues without elapse, so that a new predetermined period is set. It is possible to preferably improve the feeling of expectation for the matter.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The effect executing means can execute an operation promotion effect that encourages the player's operation in response to a predetermined period (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has a second big winning opening in the first control during the small hit game. In response to the opening of the 702B and the opening of the second large winning opening 702B in the second control, a winning promotion effect for promoting the operation (operation) of launching the game ball aiming at the second large winning opening 702B is executed. Part / In the first modification, the effect control CPU 120 can execute a button operation effect that prompts the player to operate the push button 31B according to the operation validity period of the push button 31B).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the interest.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
The predetermined period is a motion detection period in which the player's motion can be detected (for example, the operation valid period of the push button 31B in the modification 1).
The operation detection period can be set a plurality of times within a specific period (for example, a variable display period) (for example, in the modification 1, the effect control CPU 120 sets the operation valid period twice in the button operation effect. Production pattern PT-3, PT-5, PT-6 can be executed)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player expects that the predetermined display returns to the previous mode, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 6 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 5.
The effect executing means is
In the first pattern and the second pattern, the predetermined display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has the effect pattern B and the effect pattern C in the second large winning opening 702B. In the part / modification example 1 in which the display of the time gauge image Z4 in such a manner that the gauge remains from the timing Ta3 at which the opening control of the above is completed (closed) to the timing Ta4 at which the V winning determination is performed is continued, the effect control is performed. In the effect patterns PT-2, PT-4 and the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, PT-6, the gauge remains from the timing Ta4 to the timing Ta5 when the first operation valid period ends. The part that continues to display the time gauge image Z34 in a common aspect),
The predetermined effect can be executed in the third pattern in which the predetermined display is erased when the predetermined period elapses or before the predetermined period elapses (for example, the effect control CPU 120 has the second major winning opening in the effect pattern A). A portion where the time gauge image Z4 is erased at the timing Ta3 when the opening control of the 702B is completed (closed). See FIGS. 60 and 61 / In the first modification, the effect control CPU 120 is the first time in the effect pattern PT-1. The part where the time gauge image Z34 is erased at the timing Ta4 when the operation validity period of the above has expired. See FIG. 68).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player expects that the predetermined display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined period has elapsed, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 7 of the third invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 6.
The effect executing means continuously displays the predetermined display even after the predetermined period has elapsed, regardless of whether or not the predetermined effect is executed in the second pattern (for example, newly determined after the predetermined period has elapsed). Even in the effect pattern A in which the period is not set and the effect pattern PT-1 of the modification example 1, that is, regardless of whether or not the predetermined effect is executed in the second pattern, the predetermined display is displayed even after the elapse of the predetermined period. The part to be displayed continuously. Modification example)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player expects that the predetermined display is continuously displayed even after the predetermined period has elapsed, so that the interest can be improved.

(Fourth Invention)
As described above, the present embodiment includes the fourth invention shown below. That is, in a gaming machine capable of imparting an advantageous value (for example, a jackpot gaming state) to a player based on the fact that a gaming ball that has entered a predetermined area has entered a specific area, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-480. A device having a predetermined member for distributing a game ball that has entered the predetermined area and a game ball that has entered the predetermined area to the outside of the specific area, such as those described in the publications, and a device capable of storing one game ball by the predetermined member. As described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-177858, etc., a predetermined member capable of storing a game ball that has entered a predetermined area is provided, and a succeeding ball is stored in a state where one game ball is stored by the predetermined member. There were some that could be discharged outside the specific area. The gaming machine described in the above patent publication has a problem that the degree of attention to the storage state of the gaming ball that has entered the predetermined region cannot be increased. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention to the storage state of the gaming medium.
The gaming machine of means 1 of the fourth invention is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that can give an advantageous value (for example, a big hit) to a player based on the fact that a gaming medium (for example, a game ball P) has entered a specific area (for example, V winning opening 283). 1)
The rate at which the advantageous value is given changes depending on the number of game media stored by the storage means capable of storing the game medium (for example, the second storage mechanism 205) (for example, depending on the small hit type). Since the opening pattern of the second winning opening 702B is different, the number of game balls P stored by the second storage mechanism 205 is different, and the number of game balls P stored by the second storage mechanism 205, that is, the loss. The number of support balls held by the ball holding portions 273A to 273E is different, and the V winning rate (big hit probability) changes accordingly.),
The storage means has a predetermined member (for example, a distribution member 242) that can be changed in a plurality of modes, and the number of game media to be stored changes depending on the mode of the predetermined member (for example, the second storage mechanism 205). Has a distribution member 242 that can be changed into a first rotation state and a second rotation state, and is stored depending on whether the distribution member 242 is in the first rotation state or the second rotation state. The number of game balls P to be played changes. See FIGS. 9 and 10)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the degree of attention to the storage state of the game medium by paying attention to the mode of the predetermined member.
Specifically, when the game ball P that has entered the second prize opening 702B reaches the second storage mechanism 205, the distribution member 242 is in the first rotation state or the second rotation state, depending on whether it is in the first rotation state or the second rotation state. Since the number of stored game balls P changes, it is possible to pay attention to the state of the distribution member 242.

The gaming machine of the means 2 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to the means 1.
When the predetermined member (for example, the distribution member 242) is in the first mode (for example, the first rotation state), a predetermined number of game media (for example, two game balls) can be stored.
When the predetermined member is in the second aspect different from the first aspect, a number of game media (for example, one game ball) smaller than the predetermined number can be stored.
When the predetermined member stores the game medium in the second aspect, the subsequent game medium is guided to the discharge region (for example, the discharge path 210) (see FIG. 9B).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the number of stored game media can be changed by a simple configuration.
Specifically, since the number of stored game balls P can be changed simply by rotating the distribution member 242 between the first rotation state and the second rotation state, it is possible to avoid complication of the structure.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2.
By changing the mode of the predetermined member (for example, the distribution member 242), the stored game medium is guided to the predetermined path (for example, the distribution member 242 changes to the second rotation state). , The game ball P2 held by the holding portion 242a is arranged on the inflow port 203C and flows down to the third induction path 203B via the inflow port 203C. See FIG. 9C).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the stored game medium can be released by a simple configuration.
Specifically, the distribution member 242 is rotated from the first rotation state to the second rotation state without changing the distribution member 242 to a third rotation state different from the first rotation state or the second rotation state. Since the game ball P can be guided to the rotating body 208 by using the movement, it is possible to avoid complication of the structure.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
Based on the fact that the specific display result (for example, small hit) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the game medium (for example, the game ball P) can enter the predetermined area (for example, the second big winning door 702B). It is equipped with a variable member (for example, the second big winning door 702A) that changes to an enterable state.
The operation mode of the variable member differs between when the first specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display and when the second specific display result different from the first specific display result is derived and displayed ( For example, in the small hits 1, 3, 5, and 9, at most one support ball is supplied to the rotating body 208 by opening the second large winning opening 702B once based on the opening pattern A in the small hit game state. In addition, the small hits 2, 4, 6, and 10 have the largest number of support balls on the rotating body 208 by opening the second large winning opening 702B twice based on the opening pattern B in the small hit game state. In addition, in the small hit games 7 and 11, the second big winning opening 702B is opened three times based on the opening pattern C in the small hit game state, so that the rotating body 208 has the largest number of support balls. Can supply 5 pieces.),
The storage means can store the game medium that has entered the predetermined area.
The operation mode of the predetermined member differs between when the first specific display result is derived and displayed and when the second specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, any of the small hit types 1 to 10). Even so, while the distribution member 242 always operates based on a predetermined operation pattern, the distribution member 242 operates because the opening patterns A to C of the second large winning opening 702B differ depending on the small hit type. Since the opening timing and the number of times of opening for the pattern change, the operation mode of the distribution member 242 when the game ball P reaches the second storage mechanism 205 (the first rotation state and the second rotation state) depends on the small hit type. Which is different) (see FIGS. 50 to 52)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, since each operation mode of the variable member and the predetermined member is different depending on the variable display result, the monotonousness of the game can be avoided and the interest can be improved.
Specifically, the timing at which the game ball P enters the second large winning opening 702B changes depending on the small hit type, and as a result, when the game ball P reaches the second storage mechanism 205, the distribution member 242 is subjected to the first time. Since it is difficult to predict whether the game is in the moving state or the second rotating state, not only the monotony of the game can be avoided, but also the situation in which the game ball P is stored can be noticed.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the fourth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 4.
Based on the fact that the specific display result (for example, small hit) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the game medium (for example, the game ball P) can enter the predetermined area (for example, the second big winning door 702B). A variable member that changes to an accessible state (for example, the second big winning door 702A) and
An effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the game medium enters the specific area (for example, V winning opening 283).
With
The game medium enters the specific area when the first specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display and when the second specific display result different from the first specific display result is derived and displayed. The ratio is different (for example, the more game balls P (support balls) that are guided to the rotating body 208 after being stored in the second storage unit 247, the more the loss ball holding units 273A to 273E that hinder the entry of the game ball. As the number increases and the V winning rate increases, small hits 7 and 11 that can guide up to 5 support balls to the rotating body 208, and small that can guide up to 3 support balls to the rotating body 208. Probability of winning a big hit by winning V in the order of 2, 4, 6, 10, and a maximum of one support ball is guided to the rotating body 208 in the order of small hits 1, 3, 5, and 9 (advantage of the player). Is high. See Fig. 46),
The effect executing means can execute a suggestion effect in a different mode depending on which of the first specific display result and the second specific display result is the display result of the variable display (for example, effect control). By stopping and displaying the small hit symbol M having a different background color, the CPU 120 stops and displays the small hit symbol M having a different background color depending on which of the small hit types 1 to 10 is obtained as the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. , The part where the V winning suggestion effect indication suggesting that the game ball P enters the V winning opening 283 can be executed.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the interest can be improved in that the player pays attention to the mode of the suggestion effect.
Specifically, since the number of stored balls is suggested before the game ball P enters the second prize opening 702B, it is possible to raise the player's expectation that a large number of support balls will be guided to the rotating body 208. can.

(Fifth invention)
In addition, the present embodiment includes the fifth invention shown below. That is, in a gaming machine capable of imparting an advantageous value (for example, a jackpot gaming state) to a player based on the fact that a gaming ball that has entered a predetermined region has entered a specific region, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-213200. As described in Japanese Patent Publication No., etc., the specific area rotates and moves at a constant speed, and the game balls that have entered the predetermined area are stored, and a certain period of time has passed since the game balls entered the predetermined area. By releasing the storage when the lapse has passed, the game ball may flow down so as to enter a specific area. In the gaming machine described in the above patent gazette, since the rotation speed and the storage release timing of the specific region are constant, countermeasures against fraudulent acts such as causing the gaming ball to flow down at the timing when it is possible to enter the specific region are insufficient. There was a problem. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of suppressing fraudulent activities, the gaming machine of the means 1 of the fifth invention is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine) that can give an advantageous value (for example, a big hit) to a player based on the fact that a gaming medium (for example, a game ball P) has entered a specific area (for example, V winning opening 283). 1)
The game medium that has entered the predetermined area (for example, the second special winning opening 702B) can move to the specific area through the specific route (for example, the second induction routes 202A and 202B).
An obstruction portion (for example, a second) provided in the specific path for inhibiting the movement of a non-spherical object (for example, object X) while allowing the movement of a spherical game medium (for example, a proper game ball P or the like). Bottom surface 212B) (see FIGS. 7 (A) and 49)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, cheating can be suppressed.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The specific route (for example, the second induction routes 202A and 202B) has a storage unit (for example, a first storage unit 227) capable of storing a game medium (for example, a game ball P).
The obstruction portion is composed of a bottom surface (for example, a second bottom surface 212B) of the storage portion in the forming member forming the specific path.
The bottom surface of the storage portion has a smaller inclination angle than the region other than the storage portion on the bottom surface of the forming member (for example, the downward inclination angle θ2 of the second bottom surface 212B corresponding to the first storage portion 227 is the second induction. It is smaller than the downward inclination angles θ1, θ3, and θ4 of the other bottom surfaces (first bottom surface 212A, third bottom surface 212C, fourth bottom surface 212D) in the path 202A (θ2 <θ1, θ3, θ4).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, fraudulent activity can be suitably suppressed by a simple configuration.
Specifically, the flow of the object X can be hindered or the flow timing can be shifted by simply changing the flow angle of the second bottom surface 212B of the second induction path 202A in the first storage unit 227. Since it is not necessary to provide a member or a drive source, it is possible to avoid complication of the structure.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The region on the specific region side of the obstruction portion (for example, the second bottom surface 212B) on the bottom surface of the forming member forming the specific path (for example, the second induction paths 202A, 202B) has a tilt angle more than the other regions. A predetermined region (for example, the third bottom surface 212C) having a large value is formed (for example, the downward inclination angle θ3 of the third bottom surface 212C continuously provided on the downstream side of the second bottom surface 212B is the fourth bottom surface on the downstream side thereof. It is larger than the downward inclination angle θ4 of 212D (θ3> θ4).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, fraudulent activity can be suppressed by making the passing speed of the game medium uniform.
Specifically, the third bottom surface 212C can accelerate the object X that is difficult to flow down, which makes it difficult to reduce the flow down speed and aim for a V prize, so that fraudulent activity can be suitably suppressed. ..

The gaming machine of means 4 of the fifth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The specific route (for example, the second induction routes 202A and 202B) has a storage unit (for example, a first storage unit 227) capable of storing a game medium (for example, a game ball P).
Subsequent gaming media that have entered the predetermined area are guided to a special route (for example, third induction routes 203A and 203B) by the gaming medium stored in the storage unit (see FIG. 7A).
Depending on the game medium guided to the special route, the rate at which the game medium stored in the storage portion enters the specific area changes (for example, the opening pattern of the second large winning opening 702B depends on the small hit type. Due to the difference, the number of game balls P stored by the second storage mechanism 205 is different, and the number of game balls P stored by the second storage mechanism 205 after being guided to the third induction paths 203A and 203B, that is, , The number of support balls held by the lost ball holding units 273A to 273E is different, and the V winning rate (big hit probability) changes accordingly.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to the game medium guided to the special route, and it is possible to improve the interest.
Specifically, the V winning rate (big hit probability) changes depending on the number of support balls held in the lost ball holding units 273A to 273E, so that not only the game balls stored in the first storage unit 227 but also the support balls flow down. Since it is possible to pay attention to the storage and storage, it is possible to preferably improve the interest.

(Sixth Invention)
In addition, the present embodiment includes the sixth invention shown below. That is, conventionally, in a gaming machine provided with a movable body that can be operated, the first drive mechanism rotates from the first position to the second position, for example, as described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-17098. At the same time, there are those provided with a movable body that slides and moves by a second drive mechanism composed of a plurality of gear members including a rack and a pinion at the second position. In the gaming machine described in the above patent publication, there is a problem that the manufacturing cost increases because the number of parts increases due to the complicated structure of the second drive mechanism. Therefore, for the purpose of providing a gaming machine capable of suppressing the manufacturing cost, the gaming machine of the means 1 of the sixth invention is
A gaming machine capable of playing (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1).
Movable movable body (for example, directing movable body 500) and
An operation mechanism for operating the movable body (for example, an operation mechanism 501) and
With
The movable body can perform a first operation and a second operation different from the first operation (for example, in the effect movable body 500, the connecting shaft 530 of the rotating body 521 is rotated by the effect body motor 520. After performing the first operation of descending while rotating from the origin position of the effect body to the advance position of the effect body, the connecting shaft 530 is further rotated by rotating the rotating body 521, so that the connecting shaft 530 becomes the first action portion 537 of the first link member 526. The first link member 526 rotates, whereby the second link member 527 slides with respect to the second arm portion 523B, and the second acting portion 539 acts as an interlocking shaft 517 of the decorative portion 512R. It is possible to perform the second operation in which the protruding pieces of the decorative portions 512L and 512R rotate in the direction away from the decorative portion 511B).
The operation mechanism is
A first member (for example, a first arm member 523) for supporting the movable body and changing its mode so that the movable body performs the first operation, and
A second member (for example, a second link member 527, a slide portion 538) that can be displaced along the first member and allows the movable body to perform the second operation by being displaced with respect to the first member. When,
(See FIGS. 22 to 25)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, a plurality of operations of the movable body can be realized by a simple configuration using the second member, and the manufacturing cost can be suppressed.
Specifically, since the first arm member 523 for performing the first operation can be used to guide the second link member 527 for performing the second operation in a displaceable manner, the number of parts of the operation mechanism increases. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the structure from becoming complicated.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1.
The first member (for example, the first arm member 523) is a guide portion (for example, guide walls 535A, 535B) for guiding the displacement of the second member (for example, the second link member 527, the slide portion 538). It has guide shafts 534A, 534B) and
The second member is arranged coaxially with the first member (for example, the second link member 527 is arranged so as to be movable in the coaxial direction with the second arm portion 523B).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the operation mechanism can be miniaturized and space efficiency can be improved.

The gaming machine of means 3 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 1 or 2.
The operating mechanism (for example, operating mechanism 501) is
A driving means (for example, a motor for a directing body 520) and
A rotating body (for example, a rotating body 521) that is rotated by the driving means,
Have,
The movable body can perform the first operation and the second operation by the rotation of the rotating body (for example, in the effect movable body 500, the connecting shaft 530 of the rotating body 521 is rotated by the effect body motor 520. As a result, the connecting shaft 530 is the first action of the first link member 526 by further rotating the rotating body 521 after performing the first operation of descending while rotating from the effect body origin position to the effect body advance position. The first link member 526 rotates by acting on the portion 537, whereby the second link member 527 slides with respect to the second arm portion 523B, and the second acting portion 539 acts as an interlocking shaft 517 of the decorative portion 512R. Therefore, it is possible to perform the second operation in which the protruding pieces of the decorative portions 512L and 512R rotate in the direction away from the decorative portion 511B. See FIGS. 22 to 25).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the first operation and the second operation of the movable body can be realized by a common driving means.

The gaming machine of means 4 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to any one of means 1 to 3.
The second member (for example, the second link member 527) is provided with a protruding portion (for example, the second acting portion 539).
The second member can be displaced by engaging the protruding portion with a part of the movable body (for example, the interlocking shaft 517 of the decorative portion 512R) (for example, the second link member 527 is in the first slide position). The second acting portion 539 presses the interlocking shaft 517 of the decorative portion 512R by moving from At the same time, since the decorative portion 512L rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front with respect to the rotation shaft 510, the protruding pieces of the decorative portions 512L and 512R change to the second decorative state away from the decorative portion 511B. 25)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the second member can be displaced by a simple configuration and the driving force can be transmitted to the movable body.

The gaming machine of means 5 of the sixth invention is the gaming machine according to means 4.
The movable body (for example, the effect movable body 500) has a first movable portion (for example, a first movable portion 511) and a second movable portion (for example, a second movable portion 512) that can move with respect to the first movable portion. It has a decorative part 512L, 512R).
The second movable portion operates with respect to the first movable portion due to the displacement of the second member (for example, the second link member 527 moves from the first slide position to the second slide position, so that the second movable portion operates. 2 The acting portion 539 presses the interlocking shaft 517 of the decorative portion 512R. As a result, the decorative portion 512R rotates clockwise around the rotation shaft 510 and the decorative portion 512L is centered on the rotation shaft 510. Since it rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the protruding pieces of the decorative portions 512L and 512R change to the second decorative state in which they are separated from the decorative portion 511B (see FIGS. 23 and 25).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the driving force due to the rotation of the rotating body can be transmitted to the second movable portion via the second member, and the second movable portion can be operated with a simple configuration.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention may be changed or added without departing from the gist of the present invention. include.

(Modification example 1)
Next, the first modification of the second invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. In FIG. 66, (A) shows a display content output when a button operation is detected or the operation valid period ends, (B) shows a button operation effect pattern determination table, and (C) shows a time gauge display mode. It is a figure which shows. 67 is a diagram showing an example of an effect of the button operation effect in FIGS. 67A to 67F. FIG. 68 shows a timing chart showing an operation example of the time gauge display mode in the effect pattern PT-1, and FIG. 68B shows an operation example of the time gauge display mode in the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4. The timing chart (C) shown is a timing chart showing an operation example of the display mode of the time gauge in the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, and PT-6.

In the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the V winning jackpot effect (advantageous effect) corresponding to the content advantageous to the player after the opening period (predetermined period) of the second large winning opening 702B has elapsed. In addition, the present invention exemplifies a mode in which a winning promotion effect (predetermined effect) including an update operation of the time gauge image Z4 (predetermined display) corresponding to the remaining period of the opening period of the second large winning opening 702B can be executed. The operation validity period of the push button 31B (advantageous effect) is not limited to this, and for example, a big hit confirmation notification effect (advantageous effect) for notifying that a big hit will be obtained as an advantageous effect corresponding to a content (big hit) advantageous to the player is provided. It can be executed after the elapse of the predetermined period), and the button operation effect (predetermined effect) including the update operation of the time gauge image (predetermined display) corresponding to the remaining period of the operation valid period (predetermined period) of the push button 31B is executed. It may be possible.

In the present modification 1, the special symbol variation patterns include a non-reach variation pattern, a normal reach variation pattern, and a super reach variation pattern, and the effect control CPU 120 can execute variable display of the effect symbol according to each variation pattern. Is. When the fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern, the super reach effect is started when a predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the effect symbol is started, and there is a possibility that a big hit may occur during the execution of the super reach effect. It is possible to execute a button operation effect as a suggestion effect that suggests.

The button operation effect prompts the player to operate the push button 31B according to the operation valid period, and also operates the push button 31B (pressing operation by the player) within the operation valid period for effectively accepting the operation of the push button 31B. When it is detected, or when the operation valid period elapses without detecting the operation of the push button 31B (pressing operation by the player), the image display device 5 is displayed with "CHANGE!", "Extreme heat!", Or "Super intense". By displaying the character image Z32 "Heat! (Not shown)" and outputting the sounds of "CHANGE!", "Super heat!" And "Super heat!" From the speakers 8L and 8R, there is a possibility of becoming a big hit. It is a production that suggests.

As shown in FIG. 66 (A), the effect control CPU 120 is capable of executing the button operation effect based on any one of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-6, and the effect pattern PT- 1, PT-2, and PT-4 are patterns in which the operation validity period of the push button 31B is set once within a specific period (for example, a variable display period of the effect symbol), and the effect patterns PT-3 and PT-4. -5 and PT-6 are patterns in which the operation validity period of the push button 31B is set once within a specific period and then newly set once (twice in total).

When the variation pattern of the special symbol is the super reach variation pattern, the effect control CPU 120 uses the button operation effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 (B) to start the variable display of the effect symbol. It is determined which of PT-1 to PT-6 is used to execute the button operation effect. Specifically, when the variable display result is a big hit, the effect pattern PT-1 is 10%, the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-3 are 15%, and the effect patterns PT-4 and PT-5 are 25%. If the effect pattern PT-6 is determined at a rate of 10% and the variable display result is SP reach loss (super reach loss), the effect pattern PT-1 is set to 40% and the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-3 are set. The ratio of 25%, the effect patterns PT-4 and PT-5 is 5%, and the effect pattern PT-6 is 0%. That is, the effect patterns PT-1, PT-2 and PT-3, PT-4 and PT-5, and PT-6 are set so that the jackpot expectation is higher in this order. Further, the effect pattern PT-6 is a pattern in which a big hit is confirmed if it appears.

In the first modification, a mode in which the button operation effect is executed based on any of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-6 with a 100% probability in the case of the super reach variation pattern is illustrated, but the super reach variation pattern is illustrated. At this time, it is decided by lottery whether or not to execute the button operation effect, and when the execution is decided, it is decided which of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-6 is used to execute the button operation effect. You may do it. Further, the button operation effect may be executed even in a fluctuation pattern other than the super reach fluctuation pattern.

As shown in FIG. 67 (A), the effect control CPU 120 has a button image for prompting the operation of the push button 31B in the display area of the image display device 5 when the variable display mode of the effect symbol is the SP reach mode. Displaying Z30 and the character image Z31 "Press!", The operation promotion effect for urging the player to operate the push button 31B is started, and the time gauge corresponding to the remaining period of the operation valid period of the push button 31B is updated. The operating time gauge image Z34 is displayed, and the button operation effect is started.

In the effect pattern PT-1, as shown in FIGS. 66 (A) and 68 (A), a predetermined time elapses from the timing Ta1 at which the variable display of the effect symbol is started, and the mode of the variable display of the effect symbol is changed. At the timing Ta3 when a predetermined time elapses from the timing Ta2 in the SP reach mode, the time gauge image Z34 in the state where the gauge is MAX is displayed (see FIG. 67 (A)), and the operation valid period of the push button 31B starts. From the timing Ta3, the gauge gradually decreases according to the remaining period of the operation valid period, and the gauge becomes "0" after the operation valid period ends, that is, the timing Ta4, when the remaining period becomes "0". Alternatively, the time gauge image Z34 is deleted at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period (see FIG. 67C).

Further, in the present modification 1, in the effect pattern PT-1, the time gauge image Z34 is deleted when the operation of the push button 31B is detected and the character image Z32 of "CHANGE!" Is displayed during the operation valid period. Although the embodiment is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display may be continued until the operation valid period has elapsed, and may be erased at the timing Ta4 when the operation valid period has elapsed.

As shown in FIGS. 66A and 68B, the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4 are variable in the effect pattern after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing Ta1 at which the variable display of the effect symbol is started. At the timing Ta3 when a predetermined time elapses from the timing Ta2 when the display mode becomes the SP reach mode, the time gauge image Z34 in the state where the gauge is MAX is displayed (see FIG. 67 (A)), and the push button 31B is operated. From the timing Ta3 when the valid period starts, the gauge gradually decreases according to the remaining period of the operation valid period, and at the timing Ta4 when the operation valid period ends, the gauge is more than "0" and more than "MAX". The display of the time gauge image Z34 is continued until the timing Ta5 in a manner that is small, that is, the remaining period remains, and the character image Z31 of "press!" Is inverted and displayed in an inconspicuous manner. (See FIG. 67 (B)).

If the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period, the character image Z32 of "CHANGE!" Is displayed in the case of the effect pattern PT-2 and "super heat!" Is displayed in the case of the effect pattern PT-4. However, the gauge gradually decreases. Next, as shown in FIG. 68 (B), the time gauge image Z34 is erased at the timing Ta 5 when the predetermined time elapses from the timing Ta 4 where the operation valid period has elapsed (see FIG. 67 (E)).

As shown in FIGS. 66 (B) and 68 (C), the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, and PT-6 have a predetermined time elapsed from the timing Ta1 at which the variable display of the effect symbols is started. At the timing Ta3 when a predetermined time elapses from the timing Ta2 when the variable display mode of the effect symbol becomes the SP reach mode, the time gauge image Z34 in the state where the gauge is MAX is displayed (see FIG. 67 (A)) and pushed. From the timing Ta3 when the operation valid period of the button 31B is started, the gauge gradually decreases according to the remaining period of the operation valid period, and at the timing Ta4 when the operation valid period ends, the gauge is larger than "0". The display of the time gauge image Z34 is maintained until the timing Ta5 in a manner less than "MAX", that is, the remaining period remains, and the character image Z31 of "press!" Is inverted and inconspicuous. Is displayed (see FIG. 67 (B)).

If the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation validity period, the characters "CHANGE!" For the effect pattern PT-3 and "super heat!" For the effect patterns PT-5 and PT-6. Image Z32 is displayed, but the gauge gradually decreases. Next, as shown in FIG. 68C, the display of the time gauge image Z34 in the mode in which the gauge returns from the remaining mode to “MAX” at the timing Ta5 in which the predetermined time elapses from the timing Ta4 in which the operation valid period has elapsed. (See FIG. 67 (D)).

Then, at the timing Ta5, the second operation valid period is newly set, and the gauge gradually decreases according to the remaining period of the second operation valid period from the timing Ta5 at which the second operation valid period is started. After the gauge becomes "0" at the timing Ta6 when the second operation valid period ends, that is, the remaining period becomes "0", the time gauge image Z34 is deleted (see FIG. 67 (F)). ).

If the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the second operation valid period, the effect patterns PT-3 and PT-5 are "super heat!", And the effect pattern PT-6 is "super intense". The character image Z32 of "Heat! (Not shown)" is displayed, but the gauge gradually decreases.

As shown in FIG. 67 (B), in the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4, the time gauge image Z34 is displayed in such a manner that the gauge remains at the timing Ta4 when the operation valid period ends. Is maintained, the character image Z31 of "press!" Is inverted and displayed in an inconspicuous manner, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the character image Z31. Alternatively, instead of the character image Z31, an image indicating that the operation of the push button 31B is in the standby state (for example, a character image "waiting") may be displayed.

Here, in the effect patterns PT-1, PT-2, and PT-4, the operation valid period of the push button 31B is set only once, and in the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, and PT-6, the push button 31B is set. The operation validity period of is set twice in total. Then, in the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4 in which the operation valid period is set only once, the time gauge image Z34 is erased at the timing Ta5 when the predetermined time elapses from the timing Ta4 when the operation valid period elapses, and the gauge is released. The operation validity period is set twice, whereas the pattern does not return to the "MAX" mode (specific mode) from the remaining mode (predetermined mode different from the specific mode) (not the specific mode). In the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, and PT-6, the time gauge image Z34 is continuously displayed from the timing Ta4 when the operation valid period has elapsed until the predetermined time elapses, and the timing when the second operation valid period starts. In Ta5, it is a pattern that returns from the mode in which the gauge remains (predetermined mode different from the specific mode) to the "MAX" mode (specific mode) (not the specific mode).

However, the gauges of the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4 and the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5 and PT-6 remain from the timing Ta4 to the timing Ta5 at which the first operation valid period ends. The display of the time gauge image Z34 in the common mode (predetermined mode) as described above is continued. That is, in the case of the effect pattern PT-1, the display of the time gauge image Z34 may be continued at the timing Ta4 at which the display of the time gauge image Z34 ends, so that the operation valid period may be set once again. That is, it is suggested that the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, and PT-6, which have a high expectation of big hits, may be executed.

Therefore, even when the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4 for which the second operation valid period is not set are executed, at least at the timing Ta4 when the first operation valid period ends, the time gauge image Z34 is the effect pattern. By displaying in the same manner as the time gauge image Z34 in PT-3, PT-5, and PT-6, the player's expectation that the second operation valid period is set can be maintained. Therefore, the interest of the game is improved. Further, from the timing Ta4 at which the first operation valid period ends to the timing Ta5 at which the second operation valid period starts, the display of the time gauge image Z34 in a common mode such that the gauge remains is continued. Therefore, the player's expectation that the second operation valid period is set can be further maintained.

In the present modification 1, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the first or second operation valid period, or when the operation of the push button 31B is not detected and the operation valid period elapses, " Characters and sounds such as "CHANGE!", "Super heat!", And "Super heat!" Are output, but characters and characters different from the above (for example, "BIG CHANCE!" And "Hot?"), Etc. It may be possible to display an effect image or the like according to the degree of expectation of a big hit, or a light emitting body (for example, a game effect lamp 9 (LED)) may be made to emit light in a predetermined mode, or a movable body for effect (for example, for example) may be displayed. The effect movable body 500) or the like may be operated in a predetermined operation mode (movement, rotation, etc.).

Further, in the present modification 1, in the effect patterns PT-2 and PT-4, the timing Ta5 in which the predetermined time elapses from the timing Ta4 in which the operation valid period has elapsed and the second operation valid period is started, that is, the effect. In the patterns PT-2 and PT-4, a mode in which the time gauge image Z34 is erased at the timing Ta5 when the second operation valid period is started has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation is valid. The time gauge image Z34 may be erased between the timing Ta4 at which the period has elapsed and the timing Ta5 at which the predetermined time has elapsed (between Ta4 and Ta5).

Further, since the button operation effect in the present modification 1 is a suggestion effect suggesting the possibility of a big hit, the operation valid period when the operation of the push button 31B is detected or the operation of the push button 31B is not detected. The present invention exemplifies a form that suggests the possibility of a big hit by outputting characters and sounds such as "CHANGE!", "Super heat!", And "Super heat!" It is not limited, and for example, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected or when the operation valid period elapses without detecting the operation of the push button 31B, the effect image of the mode according to the expectation of the big hit. (For example, a cut-in image, a character image, a dialogue image, etc.) may be displayed.

Alternatively, when the button operation effect is executed in the look-ahead notice, when the operation of the push button 31B is detected or when the operation valid period elapses without detecting the operation of the push button 31B, the hold memory display being displayed is displayed. The mode may be changed to a specific mode.

(Modification 2)
Next, a modification 2 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 69. In FIG. 69, (A) shows a push button mode change pattern in the present modification 2, (B) shows a normal button, (C) shows a large button, and (D) shows a rainbow button. It is a figure.

In the first modification, the button image Z30 displayed during the operation valid period is shown in FIG. 69 (B) regardless of which of the effect patterns PT-1 to PT-6 is determined as the effect pattern of the button operation effect. As described above, the button image Z30 (normal button) in the normal mode imitating the push button 31B, but as shown in FIG. 69 (C), for example, the button image Z30A in a mode larger than the button image Z30 in the normal mode. (Large button) and, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), it may be possible to display a plurality of modes of button images, such as a button image Z30B (rainbow button) having a color different from that of the button image Z30 in the normal mode. ..

For example, when it is determined to execute any of the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, and PT-6 in which the operation valid period is set twice as the effect pattern of the button operation effect in the first modification, the effect control is used. The CPU 120 displays the button images displayed in each of the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period by lottery using random numbers or the like, and the change patterns A-1 to A of the push button mode shown in FIG. 69 (A). Any one of -5 may be determined, and the button image may be displayed based on the determined pattern.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 has a higher expectation of big hits in the order of button image Z30 (normal button), button image Z30A (large button), and button image Z30C (rainbow button), that is, change pattern A-1. , A-2, A-3, A-4, A-5, and one of the change patterns A-1 to A-5 can be determined so that the jackpot expectation is higher in this order. Further, particularly for the rainbow button image Z30B (rainbow button), it may be a button image for confirming a big hit that appears only when the variable display result is a big hit.

Further, in the present modification 2, as the effect pattern of the button operation effect in the modification 1, the execution of any of the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, and PT-6 in which the operation valid period is set twice is determined. Although the embodiment in which one of the change patterns A-1 to A-5 of the push button mode is determined is illustrated only in the case of the above, the effect patterns PT-1 and PT-2 in which the operation validity period is set once are illustrated. , PT-4 When the execution is decided, the type of the button image to be displayed in the first operation valid period may be decided according to the variable display result.

Further, in the present modification 2, the button image Z30 (normal button) and the button image Z30A (large button) are displayed as the operation promotion image displayed corresponding to the operation valid period (predetermined period). , Button image Z30C (rainbow button) can be displayed. In addition to the above, for example, an effect is displayed around the button image Z30, the button image Z30 blinks, or the color of the button image Z30 is blue. , Green, red, gold or a special pattern, or a mode in which the stick controller 31A is changed instead of the button image, and the like, the mode may be changed to a plurality of types.

In the second modification, the button image Z30 (normal button), the button image Z30A (large button), and the button are displayed as the operation promotion image displayed corresponding to the operation valid period (predetermined period). An example of a form in which the image Z30C (rainbow button) can be displayed has been illustrated, but for example, the time gauge image Z34 displayed corresponding to the operation valid period (predetermined period) can also be displayed in a variable display result as in the above button image. It may be possible to change to a plurality of types of modes depending on the situation. In particular, when the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, and PT-6 in which the operation valid period is set twice are executed, the effect patterns PT-1, PT-2, and PT in which the operation valid period is set once are executed. By making the mode of the time gauge image Z34 at the end of the first operation valid period (predetermined period) change to a mode different from the normal mode at a higher rate than in the case of -4, the second operation is performed. It is possible to improve the player's expectation for setting the validity period (predetermined period).

Further, in the present modification 2, as in the modification 3 described later, a gaming machine that can be set to any of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player is applied. For example, the higher the set value, the higher the ratio of determining the execution of the effect patterns PT-4 and PT-5 when the variable display result is SP reach loss, thereby making a big hit. Even if the variable display result is lost even though the highly expected production patterns PT-4 and PT-5 have appeared, it will be suggested that the setting may be high, so the interest of the game will be improved. Can be improved.

(Modification example 3)
Next, a modification 3 of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 70. 70A and 70B are explanatory views showing the first special figure display result determination table in the present modification 2 and FIG. 70 is an explanatory view showing the second special figure display result determination table in the present modification 2. be.

In the above-described embodiment, any one of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player and that has different advantages for the player. Although the gaming machine that cannot be set to the set value has been described, the present invention is also applied to a gaming machine that cannot be set to any of a plurality of set values (for example, 1 to 6) having different advantages for the player. It is possible. Specifically, when the special figure display result includes "big hit", the pachinko gaming machine 1 has set values such as the winning probability (ball output rate) of big hits (for example, set values "1" to "". 6 ”etc.) may be provided with a setting value changing function that can change the jackpot probability (probability of producing a jackpot display result) depending on the value of the set value. (For example, the jackpot probability is 1/250 for the set value "6" and 1/320 for the set value "1"). That is, the game control means (for example, CPU 103) that controls the progress of the game may be able to control the advantageous state (big hit game state) based on the set set value.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the display result of the special symbol is either "small hit" or "missing", but in the present modification 2, a plurality of machines having different advantages for the player. If any of the set values (for example, 1 to 6) can be set, the display result of the special symbol will be one of "big hit", "small hit", and "miss". At the same time, for example, it can be realized by making the number of judgment values assigned to the special figure display results of "big hit" and "loss" in the special figure display result judgment table corresponding to each set value different. In the following, for example, in the special symbol normal processing of step S110 shown in FIG. 35, it is used when determining whether the display result of the special symbol is one of "big hit", "small hit", and "loss". The display result judgment table will be described.

The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set for each set value. In the present embodiment, as the display result determination table, individual display result determination tables are used for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the first special figure is not limited to this. The display result determination table common to the figure and the second special figure may be used.

As shown in FIG. 70 (A), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 1000 to 10935 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As shown in FIG. 70 (B), when the set value is 1 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hits", and 1000 to 42767 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As shown in FIG. 70 (A), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 1000 to 10935 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As shown in FIG. 70 (B), when the set value is 2 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1253 are assigned to "big hits", and 1000 to 42767 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As shown in FIG. 70 (A), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 1000 to 10935 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As shown in FIG. 70 (B), when the set value is 3 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1272 are assigned to "big hits", and 1000 to 42767 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As shown in FIG. 70 (A), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 1000 to 10935 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As shown in FIG. 70 (B), when the set value is 4 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1292 are assigned to "big hits", and 1000 to 42767 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As shown in FIG. 70 (A), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 102 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", and 1000 to 10935 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As shown in FIG. 70 (B), when the set value is 5 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 102 to 1317 are assigned to "big hit", and 1000 to 42767 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As shown in FIG. 70 (A), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the first special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 1000 to 10935 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As shown in FIG. 70 (B), when the set value is 6 and the variable special figure is the second special figure, the range is 0 to 65535 when the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state. Of the hit judgment values compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "big hits", and 1000 to 42767 are "small". It is assigned to "hit", and other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss".

As described above, in the display result determination table for the first special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the same regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so as to be. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), in the display result determination table for the first special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value, and the small hit game state. The probability of being determined to control is set to 1/70.

On the other hand, in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" to the small hit game state is the first special figure regardless of the game state or the set value. Judgment values are assigned so that the values are the same as those in the display result judgment table. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), in the display result determination table for the second special figure, the special figure display result is set as a "small hit" regardless of the game state or the set value, and the small hit game state. The probability of being determined to control is set to 1/2.

In this way, in the first special figure game and the second special figure game, the judgment values are assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as the "big hit" and the big hit game state is different according to the set value. That is, while the big hit probability that does not go through the small hit differs depending on the set value, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be controlled to the small hit game state as "small hit" is the same value. Since the determination value is assigned so as to be, that is, the jackpot probability via the small hit is invariant, it is possible to improve the playability while suppressing the gambling. If the small hit probability, the large hit type determination probability, the small hit type determination probability, the fluctuation pattern determination probability, etc. differ depending on the value of the set value, for example, in addition to the large hit probability between each set value, the small hit This is because the difference in game performance between each set value becomes excessively remarkable, such as an excessive difference in probability.

In the present embodiment, the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" is the same regardless of the set value, but the present invention exemplifies the mode. The present invention is not limited to this, and the probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as a "small hit" may be different depending on the set value. Further, the present embodiment exemplifies a mode in which the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "small hit" and the small hit gaming state is different according to the variable special map. The probability of being determined to control the small hit game state with the special figure display result as "small hit" may be the same probability regardless of the variable special map.

Here, focusing on the numerical range of the hit judgment values assigned to "big hit" and "small hit" in each display result judgment table, it is for the first special figure when the game state is the low base state or the high base state. In the display result determination table, the range from 102 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set to the common numerical range of the jackpot determination values for determining the jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the set value is 1, only the common numerical range of the big hit judgment value for judging the big hit is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "big hit"), while the set value 2 In the case of ~ set value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value is a range of 1238 to 1253 for the set value 2, a range of 1238 to 1272 for the set value 3, a range of 1238 to 1292 for the set value 4, and a range of 1238 to 1317 for the set value 5. , The set value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

That is, in the present embodiment, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the low base state or the high base state, when the set value is 1, the value is taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Of the hit judgment values to be obtained, only the values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "big hit", while when the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range among the big hit judgment values is obtained. Numerical values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to are assigned to "big hits". Further, the non-common numerical range increases with reference to 1238 as the value of the set value increases.

Therefore, the jackpot probability increases as the non-common numerical range continuous with the common numerical range increases as the set value increases, with 1020 as the reference value for the jackpot determination value (big hit reference value). go.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure when the game state is the low base state or the high base state, the range from 1000 to 10935 of the hit judgment values determines the small hit regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the small hit judgment value for doing so. Focusing on the case where the set value is 6, when the set value is 6, the hit judgment values from 102 to 1346 are set in the numerical range of the big hit judgment value as described above, while they are small. The hit judgment value is 1000 to 10935, with 10000 as the reference value (small hit reference value) of the small hit judgment value in a numerical range different from the range of the big hit judgment value (1020 to 1346) in the case of the set value 6. Since it is set in the range, it is prevented that the numerical range of the small hit determination value overlaps with the range of the big hit determination value that changes according to each set value.

In this way, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the probability of being determined to control the special figure display result as a "big hit" to the big hit game state is low, and the larger the set value is, the lower the probability is. Judgment values are assigned so that the probability of being determined when the special figure display result is controlled to the jackpot gaming state as "big hit" is high (big hit probability: set value 6> set value 5> set value 4> set value 3). > Set value 2> Set value 1).

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and if the value of MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the jackpot, the CPU 103 determines the special symbol as a jackpot. Decide that. Further, when MR1 matches any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hit, it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is decided with the probability according to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIG. 70 indicates the probability of a big hit (ratio) and the probability of a small hit (ratio). Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control the big hit game state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hit game state, but the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the second modification, a total of six setting values, 1 to 6, are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited to this. The set value that can be set to 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more.

Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a setting value changing function capable of changing a setting value such as a winning probability (ball ejection rate) of a big hit or a small hit, the effect control CPU 120 suggests the set setting value. The suggestion effect may be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, during the variable display of the symbol, during the big hit or small hit game state, etc.).

(Explanation of deformation and application)
Further, in the above-described embodiment, the control of the second special variable winning ball device 7B based on the second pattern performed when the CPU 103 has a small hit of 8 or 12 can store up to one support ball in the first control. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to the first control and the second control, although the embodiment in which a maximum of one support ball can be stored in the second control after the first control is illustrated. The upper limit of the number of support balls that can be stored in the above can be changed in various ways, and two or more support balls may be stored in each of the first control and the second control.

Further, the upper limit number of support balls that can be stored in the first control and the upper limit number of support balls that can be stored in the second control may be different. For example, by making it possible to store up to 5 support balls in the 2nd control, even if a V prize does not occur in the 1st control, a big hit is generated with a 100% probability by performing the 2nd control. Therefore, the player's expectation that the second control is performed can be suitably increased.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the control of the second special variable winning ball device 7B based on the second pattern performed when the CPU 103 has small hits 8 and 12, if V winning does not occur in the first control, once. Although the embodiment in which the second control is performed after all the support balls are discharged is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the V prize does not occur in the first control, the second control is stored in the first control. The second control may be performed without discharging the supported support ball. By doing so, it is possible to increase the number of support balls in the second control, and it is possible to increase the probability of occurrence of the V prize as compared with the case of the first control. Expectations can be suitably increased.

Further, when two or more support balls can be stored in the first control, a part of the stored support balls (for example, one of three support balls) is discharged and the rest is stored. The second control may be performed while keeping the condition.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first control and the second control for allowing the game ball to enter the second winning opening 702B are shown in the opening control of the second winning opening 702B (for example, FIG. 36B). In addition to (contents of (1)), more details include storage mechanism control including storage, release, and discharge of the entered game ball (for example, contents of (2) to (5) shown in FIG. 36 (B)). Illustrated a form including opening control of the second prize opening 702B and release of storage of the first storage mechanism 204 (lottery and determination of V prize jackpot), but the present invention is not limited thereto. The first control and the second control may not include the storage mechanism control as long as they include at least the opening control of the second winning opening 702B, or the storage mechanism control (for example, FIG. 36 (B)). ), At least one of (contents of (2) to (5)) (for example, storage and release of the first storage mechanism 204) may be included. Further, the opening control and the storage mechanism control may each include control of other members or mechanisms (for example, rotation control of the rotating body 208).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the first control shown in FIG. 36 (C) and the second control shown in FIG. 36 (D) are the opening control of the second winning opening 702B and the entering game ball, respectively. It is the same in that it includes storage mechanism control including storage and release and discharge, but for example, the opening pattern of the second prize opening 702B and the operation pattern and timing of the first storage mechanism 204 and the second storage mechanism 205 are the same. Although different forms have been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first control and the second control include an opening pattern of the second winning opening 702B, a first storage mechanism 204, and a second storage mechanism. The control may have the same contents such as the operation pattern and timing of 205.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball that has entered the second special variable winning ball device 7B in the small hit game state can be controlled to the big hit game state based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the specific area (V winning opening 283). The present invention illustrates a mode in which the ratio of the game balls passing through the specific region changes depending on the number of game balls stored by the second storage mechanism 205 after entering the second special variable winning ball device 7B. The rate at which the variable display result of the special symbol becomes "big hit" is higher than that in the normal state, based on the fact that the game ball that has entered the variable means in the big hit game state has passed through a specific area. In a gaming machine that can control a probabilistic state in which probabilistic control (probability fluctuation control) is executed (so-called V probabilistic specification), the game ball enters a specific area according to the number of game balls that enter the variable means and are stored by the storage means. The passing rate may be changed.

In addition, a gaming machine (so-called two-kind gaming machine) capable of executing the next round game by passing a game ball that has entered the variable means in one round game in the jackpot game state has entered the variable means. Depending on the number of game balls, the ratio of the game balls stored by the game balls or the storage means passing through the specific area may change.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the support ball (a game ball that cannot pass through the V winning opening 283) that enters the second special variable winning ball device 7B and is stored by the second storage mechanism 205 in the small hit game state. Although the mode in which the ratio of the game balls stored by the first storage mechanism 204 to pass through the specific region (V winning opening 283) changes depending on the number, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined region is not limited to this. It suffices that the ratio of the game balls passing through the specific area changes depending on the number of game balls that have entered the second large winning opening 702B. That is, the ratio of the game balls passing through the specific region does not have to change depending on the number of game balls stored by the second storage mechanism 205. Further, the game balls that can pass through the specific area may be stored by the storage means, and the ratio of the game balls passing through the specific area may be changed depending on the number of the game balls stored by the storage means.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the case of the small hits 8 and 12 in which the number of support balls in the first control is small (one support ball), the CPU 103 has a large number of support balls in the first control (three support balls). 2) The second control is performed at a higher rate (100% probability) than in the case of small hits 2, 4, 6, 10 and small hits 7, 11, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, not only in the case where the number of support balls in the first control is small (one support ball) is 8 or 12, but also in the case where the number of support balls in the first control is large (3 support balls). Even in the case of small hits 2, 4, 6, 10 and small hits 7 and 11, the number of support balls in the first control is small (one support ball), which is lower than in the case of small hits 8 and 12. If it is a probability, the second control may be executable.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the case of the small hits 8 and 12 in which the number of support balls in the first control is small (one support ball), the CPU 103 has a large number of support balls in the first control (three support balls). 2) The second control is performed at a higher rate (100% probability) than in the case of small hits 2, 4, 6, 10 and small hits 7, 11, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, in the case of small hits 8 and 12 (1 opening) in which the number of times of opening of the second large winning opening 702B in the first control is small, small hits 2, 4 and 6 in which the number of times of opening in the first control is large are large. The second control may be performed at a higher rate than in the case of 10 (opening 2 times) or small hits 7 and 11 (opening 3 times).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the CPU 103 exemplifies a mode in which the upper limit number of support balls in the first control and the second control is predetermined according to the small hit type, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, it may be decided whether or not to perform the second control according to the number of support balls stored in the first control.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and the first modification, as an example of an advantageous effect corresponding to the content advantageous to the player (V prize, big hit, reach, opening of the big prize opening, etc.), the V prize big hit effect and the big hit confirmation notification Although the embodiment to which the effect is applied has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when there are a plurality of types of jackpots having different numbers of rounds as jackpot types, the number of rounds executed during the jackpot is notified. During a big hit game in which a big hit is made with a normal big hit symbol that is not a probability fluctuation symbol, a promotion notification effect that notifies the transition to a high probability state after the end of the big hit, and a high probability after the end of the big hit. Latent notification effect that suggests that the state may be controlled to a high probability state when the transition to the state is not notified, and the variable display is restarted after the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative symbol. By doing so, you can create a pseudo-continuous effect that makes one variable display look like multiple variable displays, or a reach-up effect that raises the reach (weak) to reach (strong) with high expectation of big hits. , It can be applied to various effects such as pre-reading notice effect.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the opening period of the second large winning opening 702B is applied as an example of the predetermined period, and in the modified example 1, the operation valid period of the push button 31B is applied as an example of the predetermined period. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined period may be a period set by the CPU 103 as in the above-mentioned opening period as long as it is set in relation to the advantageous effect. It may be a period set by the effect control CPU 120 as in the operation valid period. Further, the opening period may be set in relation to the V-winning jackpot effect which is an advantageous effect, or the operation valid period may be set in connection with the jackpot confirmation notification effect which is an advantageous effect. ..

Further, in addition to the operation validity period as described above, the predetermined period is related to advantageous effects such as continuation of the pseudo-ream described above, reach-up (reach development), and change in the mode of the reserved memory display in the look-ahead notice. It may be a period for the effect set from the elapse of the predetermined period to the execution of the advantageous effect.

Further, in the embodiment and the first modification, as a predetermined effect including an update operation of a predetermined display (update operation of the time gauge) corresponding to the remaining period of the predetermined period, a prize is given, which is an operation promotion effect for encouraging the player's operation. Although the embodiment in which the promotion effect and the button operation effect in the modified example 1 are applied has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and is used in an effect other than the motion promotion effect that promotes the movement of the player. May be good.

Further, in the second invention, in both the first pattern and the second pattern, when the predetermined period elapses, the display mode of the predetermined display is a common mode (predetermined mode), that is, the first pattern and the second pattern. In any of the above, not only the one in which the predetermined display is displayed in the same image but also the one in which the predetermined display is displayed in a similar (approximate) image is included. For example, in the case of the time gauge images Z4 and Z34 of the embodiment and the modification 1, if the time gauge images Z4 and Z34 are displayed in a predetermined mode such that the gauge remains in both the first pattern and the second pattern. , The remaining amount of the gauge, the color of the gauge, etc. may be different. Further, it may be suggested that a predetermined period may be newly set according to the remaining amount of the gauge, the color, and the like. It should be noted that the common mode (predetermined mode) is different from the specific mode (such as the MAX mode of the gauge) that is changed in response to the new setting of the predetermined period in the second pattern (the gauge remains). It is preferable that the mode is such that the gauge is "0").

Further, in the embodiment and the first modification, in the case of the effect pattern C, the opening period and the operation valid period, which are predetermined periods, are specific periods (for example, variable display) from the start to the end of one variable display. Although the embodiment that can be set twice in the period) is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to execute an effect pattern in which a predetermined period is set three times or more in a specific period (for example, a variable display period). It may be.

Further, the specific period is not limited to one variable display period as described above, but may be a plurality of variable display periods, or a period other than the variable display period (for example, controlled to a jackpot gaming state). It may be (such as the period during which it is done).

Further, in the above-described embodiment and the first modification, the gauges of the time gauge images Z4 and Z34 gradually decrease according to the remaining period of the predetermined period (for example, the opening period, the operation valid period, etc.). The invention is not limited to this, and the gauge may be gradually reduced according to the remaining period of the predetermined period (for example, the gauge may be reduced by a predetermined amount as the predetermined period elapses). ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment and the first modification, the gauges of the time gauge images Z4 and Z34 gradually decrease according to the remaining period of the predetermined period (for example, the opening period, the operation valid period, etc.). The invention is not limited to this, and the gauge may be increased according to the rest of the predetermined period.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and the first modification, the effect pattern C for the winning promotion effect and the effect patterns PT-3, PT-5, and PT-6 for the button operation effect have elapsed a predetermined time from the time when the predetermined period has elapsed. An example is shown in which the gauge of the time gauge image, which is a predetermined display, is changed to the "MAX" mode (specific mode) at the same timing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a predetermined period has elapsed. At the timing, the display mode of the predetermined display may be changed to a specific mode.

Further, in the embodiment and the first modification, the remaining period of the predetermined period is supported in the predetermined effect including the update operation of the predetermined display corresponding to the remaining period of the predetermined period (for example, the opening period, the operation valid period, etc.). The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a countdown effect of reducing and displaying a timer image (predetermined display) indicating a predetermined time. Alternatively, various effects such as an effect image (for example, a character, a level gauge, a life gauge, etc.) showing a predetermined period may be updated (decreased or increased) according to the remaining period.

In the case of the above countdown effect, for example, the numbers indicating the time such as "3", "2", "1", and "0" may be updated, and when the predetermined period elapses, the predetermined display is displayed. When a certain timer image is displayed in such a manner that a predetermined period remains, the display is continued without erasing the numbers "1" and "0" when the predetermined period elapses, or the numbers are blinked and displayed. You can do it.

Further, in the embodiment and the first modification, the first pattern (for example, effect pattern B / effect pattern PT-2, PT-4) and the second pattern (for example, effect pattern C / effect pattern PT-3, PT) In -5 and PT-6), the predetermined period is newly set by displaying the gauge, which is the predetermined display, in a common mode (predetermined mode) at the timing when the predetermined period has elapsed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the time gauge image of a predetermined mode in which the gauge becomes “0” at least when a predetermined period has elapsed can be erased. Instead, it may be suggested that a predetermined period is newly set by continuing the display for a predetermined period.

Further, in the embodiment and the first modification, in the case of the second pattern (for example, effect pattern C / effect pattern PT-3, PT-5, PT-6), the predetermined period is newly set after the elapse of the predetermined period. Corresponding to the setting, the embodiment in which the gauge, which is the mode when the predetermined display time gauge images Z4 and Z34 are first displayed, returns (changes) to the MAX mode (specific mode) has been illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the display mode of the gauges of the time gauge images Z4 and Z34 is not necessarily returned to the display mode when the display is started, the predetermined period is newly set after the lapse of the predetermined period. If the display mode of the predetermined display is changed to a specific mode in response to the setting to, for example, the gauge is between "MAX" and "0" (half), or exceeds "MAX". It may be changed to the mode corresponding to the remaining period of the newly set predetermined period.

Further, the specific mode is not only the one in which the gauge is in the MAX mode or not in the MAX mode as described above in the second pattern, but also the gauge is in the MAX mode, but the gauge is from blue to red. It may include a mode in which the shape of the gauge changes to gold or gold, a mode in which the shape of the gauge changes significantly, and the like. That is, a part of the display mode of the predetermined display may be changed. Further, if the second pattern is changed in response to the new setting of the predetermined period after the elapse of the predetermined period, for example, the predetermined period is newly set after the elapse of the predetermined period. Correspondingly, another image such as a timer image may be displayed instead of the time gauge image as a predetermined display.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and the first modification, the effect pattern C and the effect pattern PT-3, in which a predetermined period is newly set after the opening period of the second large winning opening 702B and the operation valid period, which are the predetermined periods, have elapsed. In the case of PT-5 and PT-6, the embodiment in which the newly set predetermined period is the same as the initially set predetermined period has been illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, The predetermined period and the newly set predetermined period do not have to be the same time, for example, the predetermined period is set to the first hour and the newly set predetermined period is set to the second time different from the first hour. Further, although the predetermined period is set in advance for each effect pattern, it may be decided by lottery or the like whether or not to newly set the predetermined period after the elapse of the predetermined period.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and the first modification, in the case of the effect pattern A and the effect pattern PT-1 in which the predetermined period is not newly set after the opening period of the second large winning opening 702B or the operation valid period, which is the predetermined period, has elapsed. , However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the predetermined period is newly set after the predetermined period elapses. Even in the effect pattern A that is not performed and the effect pattern PT-1 of the modification example 1, that is, regardless of whether or not the predetermined effect is executed in the second pattern, the predetermined display is continued even after the elapse of the predetermined period. It is preferable to display it.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second special figure game exemplifies a form in which the small hit probability is higher than that of the first special figure game, which is highly advantageous for the player, but the present invention is limited to this. The second special figure game has a higher rate of determining the jackpot, which has more round games than the first special figure game, and is controlled to a high base state B after the jackpot than the first special figure game. The advantage for the player may be increased due to a high ratio or a higher determination ratio of the small hit types 7 and 11 than in the first special figure game.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the CPU 103 has a first reserved memory and a second reserved memory, the CPU 103 displays a variable display of the second special figure based on the second reserved memory, and displays the variable display of the second special figure based on the first reserved memory. The present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The variable display of the figure may be executed, or the variable display of the second special figure based on the second reserved memory and the variable display of the first special figure based on the first reserved memory may be executed at the same time. good.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a gaming machine having a predetermined number of balls is used. The number of rented balls that are circulated inside and lent out in response to the player's request for rent and the number of prize balls given in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed gaming machine that is stored and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, points and points are given to the player instead of the game ball, and the points and points given are given to the game value.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of the gaming machine, but for example, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the game value. At the same time, one game is completed by deriving the variable display result to the variable display device capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols that can be identified by each, and according to the variable display result derived to the variable display device. The second invention and the third invention can be applied to a slot machine in which a prize can be generated.

When the second and third inventions are applied to a slot machine, advantageous effects corresponding to contents that are advantageous to the player include big bonus bonuses and regular bonuses that increase the probability of winning a small role, and operations that are advantageous to the player. A state in which the mode is notified (for example, an AT (assist time) state) or a state in which an operation mode advantageous to the player is notified and the winning probability of the replay combination is increased (for example, an ART (assist replay time) state). Etc. are included. Further, as the predetermined period, the operation valid period in the button effect executed as the suggestion effect suggesting the possibility that the bonus, AT, or ART may be won, or the final notification effect can be applied.

1 Pachinko game machine 6B Variable winning ball device 7B Second special variable winning ball device 103 CPU
120 Production control CPU
204 1st storage mechanism 205 2nd storage mechanism 208 Rotating body 272 V Winning ball holding part 273A to 273E Lost ball holding part 400 Movable passage body

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine that can play games,
The advantageous effect corresponding to an advantageous content for the player as well as a feasible after a predetermined time period, with the effect execution unit capable of executing a predetermined effect including a predetermined display update operation corresponding to the remaining period of the predetermined time period ,
The effect executing means is
The predetermined display in response to the a first pattern not the specific embodiments said predetermined display of the display mode after the lapse of a predetermined period, a certain time period as a new predetermined period of time after elapse of the predetermined period is set Any one of a plurality of types of patterns including a second pattern having the display mode of the above-mentioned display mode as a specific mode, and a third pattern different from the first pattern but not having the display mode of the predetermined display as the specific mode. The above-mentioned predetermined effect can be executed at
In any of the second pattern, the first pattern also, by displaying the predetermined display from the time when the predetermined period has elapsed in a common predetermined manner, suggesting that the specific period is set,
In the third pattern, when the predetermined period elapses, the predetermined display is erased without the predetermined mode.
Wherein in both the first pattern and the second pattern, it is possible to the predetermined period a display mode of said predetermined display at the time when the predetermined period has elapsed the display mode, such as remaining,
In any of the first pattern, the second pattern, and the third pattern, the player's motion promotion effect can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images